The Connecticut General Assembly

Joint Committee on Legislative Management

Donald E. Williams, Jr. Senate President Pro Tempore

Martin M. Looney, Senate Majority Leader John McKinney, Senate Minority Leader

D’Ann Mazzocca, Ph.D.

Executive Director

James A. Amann Speaker of the House

Christopher G. Donovan, House Majority Leader

Lawrence F. Cafero, Jr., House Republican Leader

DATE: 8/6/08 TO: All Respondents of Record FROM: Liz Saczawa RE: Responses to Vendor Questions and RFP Clarifications

Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building

The following Request for Proposal (RFP) clarifications are provided to those who have received the Connecticut General Assembly’s RFP for the Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building Please note that the deadline for receipt of all proposals is 12:00 p.m. (Noon) on August 22, 2008 in the Office of Legislative Management, Room 5100 Legislative Office Building, Hartford, Connecticut. Thank you for your interest.

1

JOINT COMMITTEE ON LEGISLATIVE MANAGEMENT

QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

8/6/08

1. Is there a listing of what is to be submitted with the proposals?

Sections two and four of the request for proposal include a list of required elements that shall be included in all proposals. Any proposal not including these elements is subject to disqualification.

2. Shall proposals include the gift affidavit and the campaign contribution form?

No, the Gift and Campaign Contribution Certification form is not required for this project.

3. Has this project been reserved for participation by set-aside vendors certified as such by CT Department of Administrative Services (DAS)? No.

4. Is a bid bond required to be submitted with the proposal?

The proposer shall submit a bid bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the total proposed contract cost along with the proposal. Failure to furnish a bid bond in the proper form and amount with the proposal will be cause for rejection of the proposal. A bid bond shall be in the form of a firm commitment as follows: a bid bond on a surety company licensed in the State of Connecticut; a postal money order; certified check; or cashier’s check. All checks shall be made payable to “The Joint Committee on Legislative Management.” Bid guarantees other than bid bonds will be returned (a) to unsuccessful proposers as soon as practical after the opening of the proposal, and (b) to the successful proposer upon execution of such further contractual documents and bonds as may be required by the proposal. A letter of credit cannot be substituted for a bid bond.

5. Will this be an off-shift project?

Portions of the project will need to be performed off hours. Work in mechanical rooms can be performed during normal working hours. Public business hours at the Legislative Office Building are 8 a.m. to 6 p.m., as indicated in section 2.3.9(a) of the request for proposal.

2

6. What is the procedure if ceiling tiles are damaged during the project?

There are no extra ceiling tiles in Office of Legislative Management’s (OLM) possession. The awarded vendor shall be responsible for obtaining and replacing ceiling tiles at his/her own expense.

7. What is the building management system at the LOB?

The building management system is an Andover Controls system.

8. Are control valves pneumatic or electric?

The control valves are electric. 9. With regard to tapping into the existing risers, is a hot tap acceptable?

The existing piping is grooved Victaulic and the wall thickness is unknown.

10. Is there chilled water in the loop?

Yes.

11. Where does the power feed from?

The first floor mechanical room.

12. Can power be run in flex conduit? Wiring shall be run in electrical metal tubing (EMT) to the maximum extent possible. Flexible conduit is acceptable when EMT is impractical.

13. What is the procedure for hot work?

The vendor must inform the facilities department of the Office of Legislative Management (OLM) at least one day in advance of anticipated hot work. All fire detection systems must be covered up, including the smoke heads. Once everything has been covered the vendor must contact OLM to request an inspection of the area to ensure all flammables are covered. Any work generating flames or sparks is considered “hot work” and must follow these procedures. The vendor must have an ABC fire extinguisher and a person assigned to fire watch present at all times when welding. Once informed of the work OLM will notify the State Capitol Police to silence the horns and strobes. Once work is completed the vendor must notify OLM.

The Connecticut General Assembly

Joint Committee on Legislative Management

Donald E. Williams, Jr. Senate President Pro Tempore

Martin M. Looney, Senate Majority Leader John McKinney, Senate Minority Leader

D’Ann Mazzocca, Ph.D.

Executive Director

James A. Amann Speaker of the House

Christopher G. Donovan, House Majority Leader

Lawrence F. Cafero, Jr., House Republican Leader

Suite 5100 * Legislative Office Building * Hartford, CT 06106-1591 * (860) 240-0100 * fax (860) 240-0122 * jclm@cga.ct.gov

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

FRESH AIR/MECHANICAL UPGRADES LEGISLATIVE OFFICE BUILDING

Contract #: JCLM09REG0019

A non-mandatory meeting and walk-through for contractors will be held on July 30, 2008 in Public Hearing Room 1B at 2:30 p.m. in the Legislative Office Building.

Sealed proposals will be received by the Joint Committee on Legislative Management in Room 5100 at the Legislative Office Building, Hartford, Connecticut for providing the Connecticut General Assembly with the goods and/or services listed herein by the date and time cited below. DATE: August 22, 2008 TIME: 12:00 p.m. (Noon)

Issued: July 9, 2008

TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Executive Summary .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Terminology ...................................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 Contact Information .......................................................................................................................... 2 1.4 Portal Website ................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 PROJECT SCOPE ..................................................................................................................... 2 2.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................... 2 2.2 Administrative Requirements............................................................................................................ 2 2.3 Technical Requirements.................................................................................................................... 5

PART 3 EVALUATION OF PROPOSALS ............................................................................................ 8 3.1 Mandatory Requirements.................................................................................................................. 8 3.2 Presentation....................................................................................................................................... 9 3.3 Qualitative Elements......................................................................................................................... 9 3.4 Scoring .............................................................................................................................................. 9 3.5 Debriefing Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 9

PART 4 PROPOSAL CONTENTS.......................................................................................................... 9 4.1 Administrative Documentation ......................................................................................................... 9 4.2 Technical Documentation ............................................................................................................... 11 4.3 Documentation Subsequent to Contract Award .............................................................................. 11 4.4 Documentation upon substantial completion of project. ................................................................ 12

PART 5 CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................... 12 5.1 Contract Conditions ........................................................................................................................ 12 5.2 Formation of a Contract .................................................................................................................. 12 5.3 Contract Breach .............................................................................................................................. 14 5.4 Accounting Records ........................................................................................................................ 14 5.5 Work Product .................................................................................................................................. 15 5.6 Renewal of Contract ....................................................................................................................... 15 5.7 Contractor Guarantees .................................................................................................................... 15 5.8 Freedom of Information.................................................................................................................. 16 5.9 Human Rights and Opportunities.................................................................................................... 17 5.10 Executive Orders........................................................................................................................... 22

PART 6 PROCUREMENT SCHEDULE ............................................................................................. 22 6.1 Issue the RFP .................................................................................................................................. 22 6.2 Meeting and Walk-Through ............................................................................................................ 23 6.3 Deadline for Questions ................................................................................................................... 23 6.4 Amendments to Request for Proposal............................................................................................. 23 6.5 Proposal Delivery............................................................................................................................ 23 6.6 Presentations ................................................................................................................................... 23 6.7 Contract Award and Process ........................................................................................................... 23

PART 7 RESERVED RIGHTS .............................................................................................................. 23 7.1 Rights .............................................................................................................................................. 23 7.2 Disqualification for submitting Proposals ...................................................................................... 24

i

ATTACHMENTS

Attachment A Vendor Evaluation Form Attachment B Corporate Resolution and Proof of Authorization Form Attachment C Certification Form Attachment D Proposal Pricing Page Attachment E Nondiscrimination Certification Attachment F Insurance Certificate Attachment G Vendor Profile Form Attachment H W-9 Form Attachment I “Request for Drawings” Attachment J Connecticut Department of Labor Prevailing wage Rates Attachment K Certified payroll Form and Contractor Wage Certification Form

SCHEDULES

Schedule A Specifications, titled “Legislative Office Building – Fresh Air Study” prepared by BVH Integrated Services, Bloomfield, Connecticut.

Schedule B Drawings MEP-1 and Cover Sheet, titled “Legislative Office

Building – Fresh Air Study” prepared by BVH Integrated Services, Bloomfield, Connecticut. [Electronic Version Only]

ii

PART 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 1.1 Executive Summary

The Connecticut General Assembly (CGA) is the legislative branch of government of the State of Connecticut. Through statutory enactments, the Joint Committee on Legislative Management (JCLM) is responsible for the coordination and management of legislative affairs and the supervision and approval of any and all legislative expenditures.

The JCLM is comprised of the top legislative leaders from each political party and works through a subcommittee system. The Personnel Policies Subcommittee is comprised of the President Pro Tempore of the Senate, the Speaker of the House of Representatives, and the Majority and Minority Leaders of each chamber. The Subcommittee is responsible for establishing legislative personnel policies, guidelines, regulations, and salary schedules, and also approves legislative expenditures exceeding $50,000. The JCLM is seeking proposals to upgrade the mechanical systems on the first floor of the Legislative Office Building as per the drawings and specifications prepared by BVH Integrated Services, Bloomfield, Connecticut. 1.2 Terminology As used herein, the following terms shall have the following meanings unless otherwise required by the context: (a) “CGA” - Connecticut General Assembly; (b) “Commission” - Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities; (c) “Contract” - Agreement signed by parties to formalize the acceptance by the state of an

offer of a responder to furnish the services described herein at the stated prices in response to the request for proposals;

(d) “JCLM” - Joint Committee on Legislative Management; (e) “OLM” - Office of Legislative Management; (f) “Proposal” - Offer submitted in response to this request for proposals, to furnish the

services described herein to the state, under the prescribed conditions at the stated prices;

(g) “Responder” - Person, firm or corporation submitting a proposal in response to a request for proposals;

(h) “RFP” - Request for proposal;

1

(i) “State” - The Connecticut General Assembly acting by and through the Executive Director of the Office of Legislative Management;

1.3 Contact Information

Mail: Attention: Liz Saczawa Office of Legislative Management Legislative Office Building; Room 5100 Hartford, CT 06106-1591 Email: elizabeth.saczawa@cga.ct.gov Telephone: (860) 240 – 0100 Fax: (860) 240 – 0122

1.4 Portal Website This request for proposal (rfp) is posted on the portal website which can be found at the following address http://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/Portal/Portal_Bids_Open.asp?F_Bid_Type=1&F_Unit=OLM.

PART 2 PROJECT SCOPE 2.1 Overview The Joint Committee on Legislative Management, through the Office of Legislative Management, (JCLM) is seeking a contractor to upgrade the mechanical systems on the first floor of the Legislative Office Building as per the drawings and specifications prepared by BVH Integrated Services, Bloomfield, Connecticut. 2.2 Administrative Requirements Proposals shall address the following administrative requirements:

2.2.1 Experience and References Proposal shall include: (a) Responder experience with projects similar to that described in this RFP; (b) Responder project references including the following:

i. Name, title, address and telephone number of reference; ii. Overview of the project; iii. Length of the project; iv. Total fees associated with the project.

2

(c) Description of the responder, including:

i. Size of firm (number of employees); ii. Resources; iii. Years in business; iv. Location; v. Current arrangements with subcontractors.

2.2.2 Individual Experience and Knowledge The proposal shall include the following in regards to the personnel assigned to complete this project: (a) A list of specific personnel assigned to the project;

(b) Evidence of five years of experience with projects similar to that described in this RFP; 2.2.3 Subcontractor Experience and Knowledge Subcontractors must be acceptable to the CGA and be approved in writing by representatives of the JCLM prior to the subcontractor starting any work on this project. The responder is required to assume responsibility for all services offered in its response. The responder shall be the sole point of contact with regard to all matters, including subcontractor performance. The proposal must include: (a) A complete list of subcontractors to be used, including a brief description of the services to

be provided by each subcontractor;

(b) The subcontractor’s experience with projects similar to that described in this RFP; (c) Subcontractor references including the following:

i. Name, title, address and telephone number of reference; ii. Overview of the project; iii. Length of the project; iv. Total fees associated with the project.

(d) Description of the subcontracting company, including:

i. Size of firm (number of employees); ii. Resources; iii. Years in business; iv. Location; v. Current arrangements with subcontractors.

3

2.2.4 Compensation The compensation for services shall be in accordance with the proposal submitted by the responder, except as negotiated and amended in writing by both the CGA and the responder. All proposals shall include a detailed listing illustrating the costs associated with each aspect of this project, along with any additional costs for which reimbursement will be sought. All these costs must also be reflected on the Proposal Pricing Page included in Attachment D. Any prompt payment discounts shall be itemized in the RFP. Other discounts will not be considered when determining which responder has the lowest proposed price. Discounts must be reflected in the base price in the RFP and on the Proposal Pricing Page included in Attachment D. Payments shall be made by the JCLM in arrears within (45) forty-five days of receipt of a properly prepared invoice. A 10% retainage will be withheld from invoices until substantial completion of the project and delivery of warranty documentation. The CGA will only reimburse the awarded vendor for hours worked as can be supported with sign in sheets maintained by Guardian Services, the CGA’s building maintenance contractor. All individuals working on behalf of the awarded vendor on the State Capitol campus shall sign in and out every time they leave or enter the premises with Guardian Services for reimbursement purposes. All individuals working on behalf of the awarded vendor on the State Capitol campus shall also sign in and out with Capitol Police in the same manner as stated above for security clearance purposes. The awarded vendor shall leave a work ticket with Guardian Services for signature upon completion of the work. There will be no compensation to the awarded vendor without the documentation detailed above. 2.2.5 Prevailing Wage Project

This is considered a prevailing wage project. All proposals submitted shall incorporate the prevailing wage rates included in this RFP as appropriate. (Attachment J)

2.2.6 Certified Payrolls

All invoices for prevailing wage projects shall be submitted along with a completed Certified Payroll Form and Contractor Wage Certification Form. Invoices will not be paid until complete and accurate certified payroll forms are received. These forms are attached to this request for proposal in Attachment K. These forms can also be found at the following links: • Certified payroll Form: http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/forms/payrollcert1.pdf • Contractor Wage Certification Form: http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/forms/contractwage.pdf

2.2.7 American Institute of Architect (AIA) Forms Invoices for this project shall be submitted on American Institute of Architecture (AIA) forms.

4

A pencil copy of the invoice shall be submitted to the OLM project manager for review. Once the pencil copy is approved a final AIA invoice shall be submitted to the architect or engineer assigned to the project for approval. Once the AIA invoices have been approved and signed, the architect or engineer assigned to the project would submit those invoices to the OLM for payment. Invoices will not be paid unless submitted in this format. 2.2.8 Change Orders The final schedule of values attached to the contract will be the basis for all change orders associated with this project. The value of change orders for work not included in the schedule of values shall be negotiated between the CGA and the awarded vendor and shall include 10% profit and 5% overhead.

2.3 Technical Requirements Proposals shall address the following technical requirements:

2.3.1 General The awarded vendor shall provide all labor and materials required to upgrade the mechanical systems on the first floor of the Legislative Office Building as per the drawings and specifications prepared by BVH Integrated Services, Bloomfield, Connecticut. 2.3.2 Specific Work The awarded vendor shall commence the following work by September 1, 2008 with an expected completion date of October 30, 2008:

a. Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable codes and regulations of local and state agencies and the utilities companies;

b. Provide and install a new fan coil unit with a chilled water cooling coil and hot water

heating coil;

c. Provide and install a new fan unit;

d. Provide and install a new condensate pump;

e. Install new chilled water, hot water and pumped condensate piping between the new fan coil unit and existing risers and floor drain;

f. Provide and install new air vents, balancing valves, shut off valves, strainers, and control

valves; g. Provide and install throttling and shut-off valves;

5

h. Provide and install new ductwork, dampers, supply diffusers and return diffusers;

i. Tie new duct into existing outside air duct;

j. Install controls connected to the existing Andover building management system;

k. Complete systems in all respects in order to be tested, accepted and ready for beneficial use.

2.3.3 Submittals All submittals in section two and four of this RFP shall be provided in the proposal. Proposals without these submittals may be disqualified. 2.3.4 Warranty Responder shall guarantee all materials and workmanship under the specifications and the contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by owner. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materials or workmanship shall be corrected or replaced immediately by responder without expense to the CGA. Such repairs or replacements shall be made to the engineer’s satisfaction. 2.3.5 Awarded Vendor’s Storage Space

(a) A limited area will be designated in the Legislative Office Building where the awarded

responder may store items for reuse, stage materials, etc.

(b) The awarded responder is not required to maintain a job site office at the site. The CGA requires that the awarded responder have a fax telephone number where the CGA can send communications. The awarded responder must provide a pager number or portable phone number at which he can be reached at all times.

(c) Due to limited on-site storage availability, the awarded responder shall confine his on-site

storage to the area designated by the CGA.

(d) The awarded responder is responsible for restoring the designated on-site storage area to its original condition.

2.3.6 Protection/Safety Measures

(a) Caution shall be exercised by the awarded responder at all times for the protection of persons

and property, and all safety regulations and other provisions of applicable Federal, State and local laws must be observed. Building and construction codes, including the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, shall be observed.

6

(b) The awarded responder shall be responsible for the adequacy and safety of all construction methods and the safe prosecution of the work. The awarded responder shall assume full and complete responsibility for safe prosecution of the work at all times, and for obtaining satisfactory results.

(c) If any operation, practice, or condition is deemed by the CGA’s designated representatives to

be unsafe during the course of the performance of the work, the awarded responder, when notified verbally and later confirmed in writing, shall take such corrective action immediately as appropriate.

(d) Extreme safety measures need to be taken during the execution of the required work as the

building will be in use and the work area must remain usable during normal working hours. (e) Any debris or dust that collects on the ground that poses a tripping and /or slipping hazard

shall be removed immediately. (f) The awarded responder shall, at all times, provide protection against the weather so as to

maintain their work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage. Any work damaged by failure to provide adequate protection shall be removed and replaced with new work at the awarded responder’s expense.

(g) The awarded responder shall pay the cost of repair or replacement resulting from theft or

damage to existing equipment, material or work due to negligence by the awarded responder in securing the project site and adjacent areas affected by the awarded responder’s operations.

2.3.7 Removal and Salvage of Material

All surplus or salvage materials are to be disposed of by the awarded responder at his expense. 2.3.8 Use of Premises (a) The premises will be occupied during the performance of work; therefore, it will be

necessary to provide JCLM with a schedule in advance when work will take place so that arrangements may be made for safe ingress and egress by building personnel, parking of vehicles, directing of traffic, delivery of goods, mail, etc. The work shall not interfere with normal, continuous, and safe operation of the building and site.

(b) Nothing contained in the specifications shall be interpreted as giving the contractor exclusive

use of the premises. 2.3.9 Work Schedules (a) The work schedule shall be cleared with the State Capitol Police and the JCLM in advance of

work in any given location. Public business hours of the State Capitol Facilities are from

7

8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, holidays excluded.

(b) Work will not be performed when temperatures or other weather conditions do not meet the product manufacturers' recommendations on use.

2.3.10 Examination of Documents and Work Site

(a) Questions regarding any aspects of this RFP may be submitted by the date specified in section 6.3 of this RFP. Responses will be posted on the portal by the date specified in section 6.4 of this RFP.

(b) Prior to submitting a proposal, each responder shall examine the RFP and may visit the site

of the work. Each responder shall fully inform himself or herself prior to submitting the proposal as to the existing conditions and limitations under which the work is to be performed, and shall include in his/her proposal a sum to cover the cost of items necessary to perform the work as set forth in this RFP. No allowance will be made to a responder because of lack of such examination or knowledge. The submission of a proposal will be considered conclusive evidence that the responder has made such an examination.

2.3.11 Drawings and Specifications Drawings and specifications, prepared by BVH Integrated Services, Bloomfield, Connecticut, titled “Legislative Office Building – Fresh Air Study” are a part of the complete Request for Proposal.

(a) Specifications, titled “Legislative Office Building – Fresh Air Study” are attached as

“Schedule A”. (b) An electronic copy of the drawings (Drawings MEP-1 and Cover Sheet, titled “Legislative

Office Building – Fresh Air Study”) are attached to electronic version of the Request for Proposal as “Schedule B”.

A printed copy of the drawings (Drawings MEP-1 and Cover Sheet, titled “Legislative Office Building – Fresh Air Study”) may be obtained at no cost from the Office of Legislative Management, Room 5100, Legislative Office Building, Hartford, CT 06106.

PART 3 EVALUATION OF PROPOSALS 3.1 Mandatory Requirements JCLM will review proposals submitted to determine if the mandatory administrative and technical submission requirements listed in section two have been addressed. The state also has the sole discretion to decide if deviations from the mandatory administrative and technical requirements are material and whether to accept a proposal if it fails to comply with said requirements.

8

3.2 Presentation After review of the written proposals by the evaluation committee, the JCLM may schedule times for some or all responders to make presentations. During these presentations, the respondent(s) may be asked to provide an overview of their written proposal, answer questions and/or provide clarifications. 3.3 Qualitative Elements Once it is determined that the proposal meets the mandatory administrative and technical requirements, the following qualitative elements of the proposal will be evaluated based on the scoring methodology identified in section 3.4. (Attachment A)

(a) Overall Approach (b) Responder’s understanding of the requirements (c) Clarity of Submission (d) Professional experience and references of the responder (e) Professional experience and references of the personnel (f) Professional experience and references of the subcontractor(s) (g) Quality of list of references from current clients for whom similar services have been provided. (h) Appropriateness of the proposed fee structure

3.4 Scoring Once it is determined that a proposal contains the mandatory administrative and technical submission requirements, the qualitative elements of the proposal will be scored on the Vendor Evaluation Form using a scale of outstanding, very good, fair and poor. (Attachment A) 3.5 Debriefing Procedure JCLM contracting personnel will send letters indicating the proposal selected for contract award. PART 4 PROPOSAL CONTENTS Responders shall submit the following required documentation. The state reserves the right to disqualify any proposal which does not include the required documentation. 4.1 Administrative Documentation The following administrative documentation shall be included with the proposal:

(a) Proposals must be sent in a sealed envelope to the Office of Legislative Management, Room 5100; Legislative Office Building, Hartford, Connecticut 06106 to the attention of Liz Saczawa;

(b) Please note only written proposals will be accepted;

9

(c) Copies: An original and three (3) copies of your proposal must be submitted.

(d) The responder must indicate on the front of the envelope: SEALED PROPOSAL: FRESH AIR/MECHANICAL UPGRADES AT THE LEGISLATIVE OFFICE BUILDING DEADLINE FOR RECEIPT: AUGUST 22, 2008 at 12:00 p.m. (NOON)

(e) Company experience and references: Evidence of company’s experience, references, and a description of the firm;

(f) Individual experience and knowledge: Provide list of personnel and discussion of experience

for personnel assigned to the project;

(g) Subcontractor experience and knowledge: List of subcontractor to be used, evidence of subcontractor’s experience, references, and a description of the subcontracting firm;

(h) Notarized Proof of Authorization: The responder must submit a form of a notarized proof of

authorization. The responder has the option of satisfying this requirement by either submitting a corporate resolution or proof of authorization. The responder is not required to use the wording provided in the Attachment But must ensure that all the information is included with the document meant to satisfy this requirement as indicated (Attachment B).

(i) Certification Form. (Attachment C) (j) Proposal Pricing Page. (Attachment D) (k) Vendor profile. (Attached H)

(l) W-9 form. (Attached I) (m) Bid Bond: The responder shall submit a bid bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the

total proposed contract cost along with the proposal. Failure to furnish a bid bond in the proper form and amount with the proposal will be cause for rejection of the proposal. A bid bond shall be in the form of a firm commitment as follows: a bid bond on a surety company licensed in the State of Connecticut; a postal money order; certified check; or cashier’s check. All checks shall be made payable to “The Joint Committee on Legislative Management.” Bid guarantees other than bid bonds will be returned (a) to unsuccessful responders as soon as practical after the opening of the proposal, and (b) to the successful responder upon execution of such further contractual documents and bonds as may be required by the proposal. A letter of credit cannot be substituted for a bid bond.

10

4.2 Technical Documentation The following technical documentation shall be included with the proposal:

(a) Tentative work plan and schedule: Proposals shall include a tentative work plan and

schedule that addresses the proposed project scope and timetable outlined in this RFP. This plan must not hinder the normal operation and use of the Capitol;

(b) Materials and products: List of materials and products to be used during the project; (c) Schedule of values: A schedule of values for payment purposes must be submitted for

approval. Each line of the schedule of values shall include profit and overhead;

(d) Approach and methodology: The responder must submit a proposed approach and methodology statement that meets the objectives of this RFP.

4.3 Documentation Subsequent to Contract Award The following shall be provided subsequent to the contract award.

(a) Final work plan and schedule: Within ten (10) days after the award of the contract, the successful contractor shall furnish a final work plan and schedule to the Architect of record and the designated representative of the CGA. The successful contractor will revise the work schedule as work progresses, deviates from the schedule, or when requested by the Architect of record or the designated representative of the CGA.

(b) Insurance Certificate: Please see minimum required levels listed in Attachment F. The responder must name the JCLM as an additional insured and provide an endorsement indicating the policy has been changed to add the state as an additional insured prior to the effective date of the contract.

(c) Performance Bond. A performance bond for the total amount of the contract award. The

responder to whom the award is made shall furnish a performance bond for the protection of the CGA in accordance with Section 49-41(b) of the Connecticut General Statutes in an amount equal to the total proposal amount within fifteen (15) days of notification of award and prior to the execution of the contract;

(d) Labor and Materials Bond. The responder to whom the award is made shall furnish a labor

and materials bond for the protection of the CGA in accordance with Section 49-41(a) of the Connecticut General Statutes in an amount equal to the total proposal amount within fifteen (15) days of notification of award and prior to the execution of the contract;

11

(e) Certified Payrolls. Prevailing wage rates that are applicable to this project are included with this RFP. Upon contract award, the contractor will be required to complete and submit a “Contractor’s Wage Certification Form” to the Department of Labor as well as submit copies of certified payrolls with their invoices to the CGA during the term of this project;

(f) Nondiscrimination Certification: Public Act 07-142 and Public Act 07-245 have amended the nondiscrimination provisions of the Connecticut General Statutes to add civil unions to the existing protected classes and to require State contractors to adopt policies in support of the new statutes by means of a resolution. Accordingly, Attachment E is a form certification that the successful contractor must deliver executed at the time that it executes the Contract. The execution and submittal of this certificate is a condition precedent to the State’s executing the Contract, unless the contractor is exempt from this statutory requirement, in which case the contractor must obtain a written waiver from the State’s Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities. (Attachment E)

4.4 Documentation upon substantial completion of project. Upon project completion and prior to payment of retainage, the successful responder shall provide the following:

(a) Letter of substantial completion of project (b) Materials and workmanship warranty documentation.

PART 5 CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS

5.1 Contract Conditions

5.1.1 Campaign Contribution Ban Acknowledgement (CCBA)

With regard to a state contract as defined in P.A. 07-01 having a value in a calendar year of $50,000 or more or a combination or series of such agreements of contracts having a value of $100,000 or more, the authorized signatory to this submission in response to the state’s solicitation shall submit the signed CCBA Form, included in this RFP, which expressly acknowledges receipt of the State Elections Enforcement Commissions’ notice advising state contractors of state campaign contributions and solicitation prohibitions, and that the proposer will inform its principals of the contents of this notice.

5.2 Formation of a Contract Upon acceptance of the proposal, JCLM will initiate the contract process.

12

5.2.1 Contract Creation This section serves as a notification to contractor that:

(i) the state’s acceptance of the proposer’s offer to furnish the services required in this RFP shall result in a contract between the contractor and the state which shall bind the contractor on his part to furnish and deliver said services at the prices specified in said proposal, except as modified through negotiations between the state and the contractor, and the state on its part to order from the contractor, except for causes beyond reasonable control, and subject to the availability of appropriated funds, and to pay for at the contract prices, the services provided for in this RFP; and (ii) all the provisions of this RFP shall be included in the terms and conditions of said contract, except to the extent provided otherwise in an agreement executed by the state and the contractor subsequent to the receipt of said proposal by the state.

5.2.2 Contract Execution The contractor shall execute a formal contract with the State of Connecticut for the complete performance specified therein. This contract is considered executed once the contract is signed by the contractor and the State. 5.2.3 Term of Contract The term of the contract shall extend from execution of the contract by both parties till project completion and expiration of all warranties. The state reserves the right to extend or terminate the contract, if needed. 5.2.4 Modification No alterations or variations of the terms of contract shall be valid or binding upon the state unless made in writing and signed by the state. 5.2.5 Transfer It is mutually understood and agreed that the contractor shall not assign, transfer, convey, sublet, or otherwise dispose of his contract or his right, title or interest therein, or his power to execute such contract, to any other person, firm or corporation, without the previous written consent of the state. Any subcontracting work done in regards to this contract must be agreed to in writing by the state before the contractor begins any work. 5.2.6 Governing Law This RFP and any contract awarded pursuant thereto shall be governed by the laws of the State of Connecticut with or without reference to principles of conflicts of laws. The parties agree to

13

adjudication by, and hereby waive any objection to the jurisdiction of, such state and federal courts as are situated in Hartford, Connecticut. Notwithstanding any provision or language in this contract to the contrary, the state may terminate this contract whenever it determines that such determination is in the best interests of the state. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the contractor of a written notice of termination. The notice of termination shall be sent by registered mail to the contractor’s address furnished to the state for purposes of correspondence or by hand delivery. Upon receipt of such notice, the contractor shall both immediately discontinue all services affected (unless the notice directs otherwise) and deliver to the state all data, drawings, specifications, reports, estimates, summaries, and such other information and materials as may have been accumulated by the contractor in performing his duties under this contract, whether completed or in progress. All such documents, information, and materials shall become the property of the state. In the event of such termination, the contractor shall be entitled to reasonable compensation as determined by the state, however, no compensation for lost profits shall be allowed.

5.3 Contract Breach

5.3.1 Failure to Perform Failure of the contractor to deliver commodities or services as provided for herein or failure to make

replacements of rejected commodities when so requested, immediately or as directed by the state, will constitute authority for the state to purchase in the open market to replace the commodities or services rejected or not delivered. The state reserves the right to authorize immediate purchases in the open market against rejections on any contract when necessary. The contractor agrees promptly to reimburse the state for excess costs occasioned by such purchases. However, should public necessity demand it, the state reserves the right to use or consume commodities delivered which are substandard in quality, subject to an adjustment in price to be determined by the state. 5.3.2 Rejection

Any services rendered by the contractor hereunder which fail in any way to meet the terms of the

contract are subject to rejection or payment on an adjusted price basis. The decision of the state shall be final. 5.3.3 Cancellation The state reserves the right to cancel this contract within five days notice due to unsatisfactory performance. In the event that this is done, the contractor will be paid for all the work performed or commodities provided up to the time of cancellation.

5.4 Accounting Records

The contractor, when under contract, shall maintain adequate accounting records in accordance with all applicable state regulations in connection with this project and such records shall be made available for inspection by the state or other persons designated by the state. The contractor shall

14

make such accounts and records accessible to authorized state officials for the purpose of audit and examination. All records must be maintained for a minimum of three years after completion of the contract.

5.5 Work Product

All materials developed in conjunction with the contract shall become the property of the state at no additional cost. No report or document produced in whole or in part in connection with the contract shall be the subject of an application for copyright by or on behalf of the contractor. The contractor, when under contract, shall not use the name of the state for advertising or promotional purposes without prior permission in writing. The contractor is allowed to use name of the state as a reference.

5.6 Renewal of Contract

The state reserves the right to renew this contract under the conditions set forth in Section 2-71u of the Connecticut General Statutes.

5.7 Contractor Guarantees (a) The contractor hereby agrees and guarantees to perform any contract awarded in accordance with the

specifications, terms and conditions contained in this RFP.

(b) The contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the state and its officers, representatives, agents, servants, employees, successors and assigns from and against any and all (1) claims arising, directly or indirectly, in connection with the contract, including the acts of commission or omission (collectively, the "Acts") of the contractor or contractor parties; and (2) liabilities, damages, losses, costs and expenses, including but not limited to, attorneys' and other professionals' fees, arising, directly or indirectly, in connection with claims, acts or the contract. The contractor shall use counsel reasonably acceptable to the state in carrying out its obligations under this section. The contractor’s obligations under this section to indemnify, defend and hold harmless against claims includes claims concerning confidentiality of any part of or all of the bid or any records, any intellectual property rights, other proprietary rights of any person or entity, copyrighted or uncopyrighted compositions, secret processes, patented or unpatented inventions, articles or appliances furnished or used in the performance of the contract.

(c) The contractor shall reimburse the state for any and all damages to the real or personal property of

the state caused by the acts of the contractor or any contractor parties. The state shall give the contractor reasonable notice of any such claims.

(d) The contractor’s duties under this section shall remain fully in effect and binding in accordance with

the terms and conditions of the contract, without being lessened or compromised in any way, even where the contractor is alleged or is found to have merely contributed in part to the acts giving rise

15

to the claims and/or where the state is alleged or is found to have contributed to the acts giving rise to the claims.

(e) The contractor shall carry and maintain at all times during the term of the contract, and during the

time that any provisions survive the term of the contract, sufficient commercial general liability insurance to satisfy its obligations under this contract. The contractor shall name the State as an additional insured on the policy and shall provide a certificate of insurance or a copy of the policy to the State prior to the effective date of the contract. The contractor shall not begin performance until the delivery of the policy to the CGA.

(f) The rights provided in this section for the benefit of the state shall encompass the recovery of

attorneys’ and other professionals’ fees expended in pursuing a claim against a third party.

(g) This section shall survive the termination, cancellation or expiration of the contract, and shall not be limited by reason of any insurance coverage.

5.8 Freedom of Information

5.8.1 Freedom of Information Act Due regard will be given to the protection of proprietary information contained in all proposals received; however, contractors should be aware that all materials associated with this procurement are subject to the terms of the Freedom of Information Act, the Privacy Act and all rules, regulations and interpretations resulting therefrom. 5.8.2 Proprietary Information It will not be sufficient for a contractor to merely state generally that the proposal is proprietary in nature and not therefore subject to release to third parties. Those particular pages or sections which a contractor believes to be proprietary must be specifically identified as such. Convincing explanation and rationale sufficient to justify each exception from release consistent with Section 1-210 of the Connecticut General Statutes must accompany the proposal. The rationale and explanation must be stated in terms of the prospective harm to the competitive position of the contractor that would result if the identified material were to be released and the reasons why the materials are legally exempt from release pursuant to the above-cited statute. 5.8.3 Administrative Authority Between the contractor and the state, the final administrative authority to release or exempt any or all material so identified rests with the state.

16

5.9 Human Rights and Opportunities 5.9.1 Required Compliance with Human Rights and Opportunities Regulations Any contractor must agree to comply with the statutes referred to in this section as they exist on the date of the contract that results from this proposal and as they may be adopted or amended from time to time during the term of the contract and any amendments thereto.

Incorporated by reference into this contract are applicable provisions of the Connecticut General Statutes including but not limited to Sections 4a-60, 4a-60a, 46a-71(d), 46a-81i(d). 5.9.2 Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action Provisions in contracts of the state and

political subdivisions other than municipalities. (Conn. Gen. Stat. 4a-60) (a) Every contract to which the state or any political subdivision of the state other than a municipality is a party shall contain the following provisions:

(1) The contractor agrees and warrants that in the performance of the contract such contractor will not discriminate or permit discrimination against any person or group of persons on the grounds of race, color, religious creed, age, marital status, national origin, ancestry, sex, mental retardation or physical disability, including, but not limited to, blindness, unless it is shown by such contractor that such disability prevents performance of the work involved, in any manner prohibited by the laws of the United States or of the state of Connecticut. The contractor further agrees to take affirmative action to insure that applicants with job-related qualifications are employed and that employees are treated when employed without regard to their race, color, religious creed, age, marital status, national origin, ancestry, sex, mental retardation, or physical disability, including, but not limited to, blindness, unless it is shown by such contractor that such disability prevents performance of the work involved; (2) The contractor agrees, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, to state that it is an "affirmative action-equal opportunity employer" in accordance with regulations adopted by the commission; (3) The contractor agrees to provide each labor union or representative of workers with which such contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding and each vendor with which such contractor has a contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the commission advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under this section, and to post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment; (4) The contractor agrees to comply with each provision of this section and sections 46a-68e and 46a-68f and with each regulation or relevant order issued by said commission pursuant to sections 46a-56, 46a-68e and 46a-68f; (5) The contractor agrees to provide the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities with such information requested by the commission, and permit access to pertinent books, records and

17

accounts, concerning the employment practices and procedures of the contractor as relate to the provisions of this section and section 46a-56. If the contract is a public works contract, the contractor agrees and warrants that he will make good faith efforts to employ minority business enterprises as contractor and suppliers of materials on such public works project.

(b) For the purposes of this section, "minority business enterprise" means any small contractor or supplier of materials fifty-one per cent or more of the capital stock, if any, or assets of which is owned by a person or persons:

(1) Who are active in the daily affairs of the enterprise, (2) Who have the power to direct the management and policies of the enterprise and

(3) Who are members of a minority, as such term is defined in subsection (a) of section 32-9n; and "good faith" means that degree of diligence which a reasonable person would exercise in the performance of legal duties and obligations. "Good faith efforts" shall include, but not be limited to, those reasonable initial efforts necessary to comply with statutory or regulatory requirements and additional or substituted efforts when it is determined that such initial efforts will not be sufficient to comply with such requirements.

(c) Determination of the contractor's good faith efforts shall include but shall not be limited to the following factors: The contractor's employment and subcontracting policies, patterns and practices; affirmative advertising, recruitment and training; technical assistance activities and such other reasonable activities or efforts as the commission may prescribe that are designed to ensure the participation of minority business enterprises in public works projects. (d) The contractor shall develop and maintain adequate documentation, in a manner prescribed by the commission, of its good faith efforts. (e) The contractor shall include the provisions of subsection (a) of this section in every subcontract or purchase order entered into in order to fulfill any obligation of a contract with the state and such provisions shall be binding on a subcontractor, vendor or manufacturer unless exempted by regulations or orders of the commission. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any such subcontract or purchase order as the commission may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance in accordance with section 46a-56; provided, if such contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the commission, the contractor may request the State of Connecticut to enter into any such litigation or negotiation prior thereto to protect the interests of the state and the state may so enter.

5.9.3 Contracts of the state and political subdivisions, other than municipalities, to contain provisions re nondiscrimination on the basis of sexual orientation. (Conn. Gen. Stat. 4a-60a) (a) Every contract to which the state or any political subdivision of the state other than a municipality is a party shall contain the following provisions:

18

(1) The contractor agrees and warrants that in the performance of the contract such contractor will not discriminate or permit discrimination against any person or group of persons on the grounds of sexual orientation, in any manner prohibited by the laws of the United States or of the state of Connecticut, and that employees are treated when employed without regard to their sexual orientation; (2) The contractor agrees to provide each labor union or representative of workers with which such contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding and each vendor with which such contractor has a contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under this section, and to post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment; (3) The contractor agrees to comply with each provision of this section and with each regulation or relevant order issued by said commission pursuant to section 46a-56; (4) The contractor agrees to provide the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities with such information requested by the commission, and permit access to pertinent books, records and accounts, concerning the employment practices and procedures of the Contractor which relate to the provisions of this section and section 46a-56.

(b) The contractor shall include the provisions of subsection (a) of this section in every subcontract or purchase order entered into in order to fulfill any obligation of a contract with the state and such provisions shall be binding on a subcontractor, vendor or manufacturer unless exempted by regulations or orders of the commission. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any such subcontract or purchase order as the commission may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance in accordance with section 46a-56; provided, if such contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the commission, the contractor may request the state of Connecticut to enter into any such litigation or negotiation prior thereto to protect the interests of the state and the state may so enter. 5.9.4 Discriminatory Practices by State Agencies (Conn. Gen. Stat. 46a-71(d) Every state contract or subcontract for construction on public buildings or for other public works or for goods and services shall conform to the intent of section 4a-60 and 4a-60a. 5.9.5 Sexual orientation discrimination: Services of state agencies. (Conn. Gen. Stat. 46a-81i(d)) Every state contract or subcontract for construction on public buildings or for other public work or for goods and services shall conform to the intent of section 4a-60a.

19

5.9.6 Enforcement (Conn. Gen. Stat. 46a- 56(a)) (a) The commission shall:

(1) Investigate the possibilities of affording equal opportunity of profitable employment to all persons, with particular reference to job training and placement;

(2) Compile facts concerning discrimination in employment, violations of civil liberties and

other related matters;

(3) Investigate and proceed in all cases of discriminatory practices as provided in this chapter and noncompliance with the provisions of Sections 4a-60, 4a-60a and 46a-68c to 46a-68f, inclusive, of the Connecticut General Statutes;

(4) From time to time, but not less than once a year, report to the Governor as provided in

Section 4a-60 of the Connecticut General Statutes, making recommendations for the removal of such injustices as it may find to exist and such other recommendations as it deems advisable and describing the investigations, proceedings and hearings it has conducted and their outcome, the decisions it has rendered and the other work it has performed;

(5) Monitor state contracts to determine whether they are in compliance with Sections 4a-60 and

4a-60a of the Connecticut General Statutes and all other provisions of the general statutes which prohibit discrimination; and

(6) Compile data concerning state contracts with female and minority business enterprises and

submit a report annually to the General Assembly concerning the employment of such business enterprises as contractor and subcontractor.

(b) The commission may, when it is deemed in the best interests of the state, exempt a contractor

from the requirements of complying with any or all of the provisions of Section 4a-60, 4a-60a, 46a-68c, 46a-68d or 46a-68e of the Connecticut General Statutes in any specific contract. Exemptions under the provisions of this section may include, but not be limited to, the following instances: (1) If the work is to be or has been performed outside the state and no recruitment of workers within the limits of the state is involved; (2) those involving less than specified amounts of money or specified numbers of workers; (3) to the extent that they involve subcontracts below a specified tier. The commission may also exempt facilities of a contractor which are in all respects separate and distinct from activities of the contractor related to the performance of the contract, provided such an exemption shall not interfere with or impede the effectuation of the purposes of this section and Sections 4a-60, 4a-60a, 4a-60g, 4a-62 and 46a-68b to 46a-68k, inclusive, of the Connecticut General Statutes.

(c) If the commission determines through its complaint procedure that a contractor or

subcontractor is not complying with anti-discrimination statutes or contract provisions required under Sections 4a-60, 4a-60a, 46a-68c, 46a-68d, 46a-68e or 46a-68f of the Connecticut General Statutes, (A) the state shall retain two per cent of the total contract price per month on

20

any existing contract with such contractor and (B) the contractor shall be prohibited from participation in any further contracts with state agencies until: (i) the expiration of a period of two years from the date of the finding of noncompliance or (ii) the commission determines that the contractor has adopted policies consistent with such statutes. The commission shall make such a determination as to whether the contractor has adopted such policies within forty-five days of its determination of noncompliance. In addition, the commission may do one or more of the following: (1) publish or cause to be published, the names of contractor or unions which it has found to be in noncompliance with such provisions; (2) notify the Attorney General that, in cases in which there is substantial or material violation or the threat of substantial or material violation of the contractual provisions set forth in Sections 4a-60 or 4a-60a of the Connecticut General Statutes, appropriate proceedings should be brought to enforce those provisions, including the enjoining, within the limitations of applicable law, of organizations, individuals or groups who prevent directly or indirectly, or seek to prevent directly or indirectly, compliance with the provisions of said Sections 4a-60 of 4a-60a of the Connecticut General Statutes; (3) recommend to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission or the Department of Justice that appropriate proceedings be instituted under Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, when necessary; (4) recommend to the appropriate prosecuting authority that criminal proceedings be brought for the furnishing of false information to any contracting agency or to the commission as the case may be; (5) order the contracting agency to refrain from entering into further contracts, or extension or other modifications of existing contracts, with any noncomplying contractor, until such contractor has satisfied the commission that such contractor has established and will carry out personnel and employment policies in compliance with antidiscrimination statutes and provisions of Sections 4a-60, 4a-60a and 46a-68c to 46a-68f, inclusive, of the Connecticut General Statutes. The commission shall adopt regulations in accordance with Chapter 54 of the Connecticut General Statutes to implement the provisions of this section.

(d) If the commission determines through its complaint procedure and after a hearing held in

accordance with Chapter 54 of the Connecticut General Statutes that, with respect to a state contract, a contractor, subcontractor or supplier of materials has (1) fraudulently qualified as a minority business enterprise or (2) performed services or supplied materials on behalf of another contractor, subcontractor or supplier of materials knowing (A) that such other contractor, subcontractor or supplier has fraudulently qualified as a minority business enterprise in order to comply with antidiscrimination statutes or contract provisions required under Section 4a-60 or 4a-60a of the Connecticut General Statutes, and (B) that such services or materials are to be used in connection with a contract entered into pursuant to Section 4a-60g(b) of the Connecticut General Statutes it shall assess a civil penalty of not more than ten thousand dollars upon such contractor, subcontractor or supplier of materials. The Attorney General, upon complaint of the commission, shall institute a civil action in the superior court for the judicial district of Hartford to recover such penalty. Any penalties recovered shall be deposited in a special fund and shall be held by the Treasurer separate and apart from all other moneys, funds and accounts. The resources in such fund shall, pursuant to regulations adopted by the commission in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 54 of the Connecticut General Statutes, be used to assist minority business enterprises. As used in this section, "minority business enterprise" means any contractor, subcontractor or supplier of materials fifty-one per cent or more of the capital stock, if any, or assets of which is owned by a person or persons: (1)

21

Who are active in the daily affairs of the enterprise; (2) who have the power to direct the management and policies of the enterprise; and (3) who are members of a minority, as such term is defined in Section 32-9n(a) of the Connecticut General Statutes.

5.9.7 Contractor required to file compliance reports (Conn. Gen. Stat. 46a-68e) Each contractor shall file, and shall cause each of his contractors to file, with the commission such compliance reports at such times as the commission may direct. Compliance reports shall contain such information as to the practices, policies, programs and employment policies, employment programs, and employment statistics of the contractor and each subcontractor and be in such form as the commission may prescribe. 5.9.8 Compliance reports to include labor union practices: (Conn. Gen. Stat. 46a-68f) Whenever the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding with a labor union or an agency referring workers or providing or supervising apprenticeship or training for such workers, the compliance report shall include information pertaining to such labor union's or agency's practices and policies affecting compliance, as the commission may prescribe; provided, to the extent such information is within the exclusive possession of a labor union or an agency referring workers or providing or supervising apprenticeship or training and such labor union or agency refuses to furnish information to the contractor, the contractor shall so certify to the commission as part of its compliance report and shall set forth what efforts have been made to obtain such information. 5.9.9 Labor Reporting: The contractor also agrees to make available to the State Department of Labor a listing of all available employment openings for the purpose of carrying out the terms of the contract.

5.10 Executive Orders

This contract is subject to the provisions of Executive Order No. Three of Governor Thomas J. Meskill, promulgated June 16, 1971, concerning labor employment practices, Executive Order No. Seventeen of Governor Thomas J. Meskill, promulgated February 15, 1973, concerning the listing of employment openings and Executive Order No. Sixteen of Governor John G. Rowland promulgated August 4, 1999, concerning violence in the workplace, all of which are incorporated into and are made a part of this agreement as if they had been fully set forth in it. Proposers may receive copies of these documents upon request.

PART 6 PROCUREMENT SCHEDULE

6.1 Issue the RFP

The RFP will be issued by July 9, 2008.

22

6.2 Meeting and Walk-Through

A non-mandatory meeting and walk-through for contractors will be held on July 30, 2008 in Public Hearing Room 1B at the Legislative Office Building. A walk-through of the facilities will be held at 2:30 p.m.

6.3 Deadline for Questions

All questions must be submitted in writing by August 1, 2008. These submissions must be addressed to the attention of Liz Saczawa at the Office of Legislative Management; Legislative Office Building; Room 5100, Hartford, CT 06106-1591; elizabeth.saczawa@cga.ct.gov.

6.4 Amendments to Request for Proposal

All amendments to the RFP and response to written questions will be published no later than 5:00 pm on August 6, 2008.

6.5 Proposal Delivery

All sealed proposals must be delivered by 12:00 p.m. (Noon) on August 22, 2008 to the Joint Committee on Legislative Management in Room 5100 at the Legislative Office Building, Hartford, Connecticut.

6.6 Presentations

Those vendors submitting proposals may be contacted for a time to make presentations to provide an overview of their written proposal, answer questions and/or provide clarifications.

6.7 Contract Award and Process

The successful contractor will be notified they are the preferred candidate once approved by legislative leaders.

PART 7 RESERVED RIGHTS

7.1 Rights

7.1.1 Amendment or withdrawal of proposal The state reserves the right to amend and/or cancel this RFP at any time prior to the proposal opening, and to correct any award erroneously made as a result of clerical error on the part of the state.

23

7.1.2 Refusal of Proposal The state reserves the right to refuse any and all proposals hereunder. The state may refuse any proposal that does not meet the entire RFP. 7.1.3 Public Inspection All proposals are subject to public inspection upon award. 7.1.4 Advertising No logos, advertising or proprietary information are allowed on products installed at the State Capitol Facilities.

7.2 Disqualification for submitting Proposals

7.2.1 Disqualification from submitting proposals for contracts. Suspension (Conn. Gen. Stat. 2-71r)

(a) The Joint Committee on Legislative Management may disqualify any person, firm or corporation, for up to two years, from submitting a proposal for, applying for, or participating as a subcontractor under contracts with the legislative department, pursuant to Section 2-71p of the Connecticut General Statutes, for contractual services required by the legislative department, for one or more causes set forth under subsection (c) of this section. The committee shall provide notice and an opportunity to be heard to the person, firm or corporation which is the subject of the proceeding. The committee shall issue a written decision within ninety days of the last date of such hearing and state in the decision the reasons for the action taken and, if the person, firm or corporation is being disqualified, the period of such disqualification. The committee shall send the decision to such person, firm or corporation by certified mail, return receipt requested. The written decision shall be a final decision for the purposes of sections 4-180 and 4-183 of the Connecticut General Statutes.

(b) Before initiating such a proceeding or during the proceeding, the committee may suspend the person, firm or corporation from being considered for the awarding of such a contract for such contractual services, if the committee determines that there is probable cause for disqualification under section 7.2.1. No such suspension shall exceed three months. The committee may suspend such a person, firm or corporation only by issuing a written decision setting forth the reasons for, and the period of, the suspension. The committee shall send the decision to such person, firm or corporation by certified mail, return receipt requested.

(c) Cause for disqualification or suspension from submitting proposals shall include the following:

(1) Conviction or entry of a plea of guilty for commission of a criminal offense as an incident to obtaining or attempting to obtain a public or private contract or subcontract, or in the performance of such contract or subcontract;

24

25

(2) Conviction or entry of a plea of guilty under state or federal law for embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, receiving stolen property or any other offense indicating a lack of business integrity or business honesty which affects responsibility as a state contractor(s);

(3) Conviction or entry of a plea of guilty under state or federal antitrust, collusion or conspiracy statutes arising out of the submission of bids or proposals;

(4) Noncompliance with contract provisions, of a character regarded by the committee to be of such gravity as to indicate a lack of responsibility to perform as a state contractor(s), including deliberate failure, without good cause, to perform in accordance with specifications or time limits provided in a contract;

(5) Recent record of failure to perform or of unsatisfactory performance in accordance with the terms of one or more contracts, unless such failure to perform or unsatisfactory performance was caused by acts beyond the control of the contractor(s) or supplier; or

(6) Any other cause the committee determines to be so serious or compelling as to affect responsibility as a state contractor(s), including disqualification by another governmental entity, having caused financial loss to the state or having caused a serious delay or inability of state officials to carry out their duties on a past contract or contracts.

7.2.2 Reduction of Disqualification Period The committee may reduce the period or extent of disqualification, upon the contractor(s)’s request, supported by documentation, for the following reasons:

(a) Newly discovered material evidence (b) Reversal of the conviction upon which the disqualification was based; (c) Bona fide change in ownership or management; (d) Elimination of other causes for which the disqualification was imposed; or (e) Other reasons the committee deems appropriate.

7.2.3 Disqualification Exception The committee may grant an exception permitting a disqualified contractor(s) to participate in a particular contract or subcontract upon a written determination by the committee that there is good cause, in the interest of the public, for such action.

VENDOR EVALUATION FORM ATTACHMENT A Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building JCLM09REG0019

The Connecticut General Assembly Joint Committee on Legislative Management Legislative Office Building – Room 5100 Hartford, CT 06106 (860) 240 – 0100 FAX: (860) 240 - 0122

Title: Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building

Name of Vendor: Evaluation Contact: Date:

Outstanding Very Good

Fair Poor

1. Overall approach 2. Responder’s understanding of the requirements 3. Clarify of submission 4. Professional experience and references of the responder 5. Professional experience and references of the personnel 6. Professional experience and references of the subcontractor(s) 7. Quality of list of references from current clients for whom similar services have been provided 8. Appropriateness of the proposed fee structure

CORPORATE RESOLUTION AND PROOF OF AUTHORIZATION FORM ATTACHMENT B Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building JCLM09REG0019

The Connecticut General Assembly Joint Committee on Legislative Management Legislative Office Building : Rm 5100 Hartford, CT 06106 (860) 240 – 0100 FAX: (860) 240 – 0122

The proposer has the option of submitting either a corporate resolution OR proof of authorization

similar to those below. The proposer is not required to use the wording below, but must ensure that all the

information below is included with the document meant to satisfy this requirement.

SAMPLE CORPORATE RESOLUTION

CERTIFICATION OF AUTHORITY

(DATE)

At a meeting of the Directors of (insert company name) duly called and held at (insert location of

meeting) (location of meeting) on ________ (day of meeting) day of ________________(date of meeting),

at which a quorum was present and acting, it was VOTED that

______________________________________________ (name of authorized signer), the

_________________________________________ (title of authorized signer) of the Corporation is hereby

authorized and empowered to make, enter into, sign, seal and deliver in behalf of this Corporation a

contract for ____________________________________________ (description of project or services) with

the Connecticut General Assembly, Joint Committee on Legislative Management in connection with said

contract.

I do hereby certify that the above is a true and correct copy of the record, that said vote has not

been amended or repealed and is in full force and effect as of this date and that

________________________________________ (name of authorized signer), is duly elected

_________________________________________(title of authorized signer) of this Corporation.

Attest: (Signature of Clerk)_______________________

(Affix Corporate Seal Here) (Printed Name of Clerk)

Date: (Date of meeting) Clerk

Attachment B

SAMPLE PROOF OF AUTHORIZATION

PROOF OF AUTHORIZATION

(LOCATION)

(DATE)

On this ______ (day of authorization) day of ______________________ (date of authorization),

before me personally came __________________________________________ (name of authorized

signer), to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did state he resides in

____________________________ (state of residence); that he is the ______________________________

(title of authorized signer) of ____________________________________________(company name); and

that he has authorization to submit this proposal and enter into a contract for

___________________________________ (description of services or project) .

Attest:

(Affix Corporate Seal Here)

Date: (Date of notary signature) (Signature of Notary )______________________

(Printed Name of Notary)

Notary Public, (State of Commission)

Commission Expires: (Date commission expires)

CERTIFICATION FORM ATTACHMENT C Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building JCLM09REG0019

The Connecticut General Assembly Joint Committee on Legislative Management Legislative Office Building : Rm 5100 Hartford, CT 06106 (860) 240 – 0100 FAX: (860) 240 – 0122

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned, accepting the conditions set forth herein, hereby agrees in strict accordance therewith, to furnish these services and/or commodities to the General Assembly as listed in the Request for Proposal in accordance with the following guidelines:

Independent Price Determinations and Offer of Gratuities: 1. The costs proposed have been arrived at independently, without consultation, communication, or

agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such process with any other organization or with any competitor;

2. Unless otherwise required by law, the costs quoted have not been knowingly disclosed by the

Proposer on a prior basis directly or indirectly to any other organization or to any competitor;

3. No attempt has been made or will be made by the Proposer to induce any other person or firm to submit or not to submit a Proposal for the purpose of restricting competition;

4. The Proposer has no knowledge of the specific Proposal contents prior to actual receipt of the

Proposal;

5. The Proposer certifies that no elected or appointed official or employee of the State of Connecticut has or will benefit financially or materially from this procurement. Any contract arising from this procurement may be terminated by the State if it is determined that gratuities in excess of those allowed under Chapter 10 of the Connecticut General Statutes (Code of Ethics for Public Officials) were either offered to or received by any of the aforementioned officials or employees from the Contractor's agent or the Contractor's employee(s).

The Proposer agrees to furnish these services and/or commodities to the Connecticut General Assembly as listed in the Request for Proposal at the prices indicated on Attachment E.

SIGNED AND DATED this day of Company:

Address:

Signature: Date:

Name (Printed):

Title:

Telephone No: Fax No:

Federal Employer Identification No:

PROPOSAL PRICING PAGE ATTACHMENT D Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building JCLM09REG0019

The Connecticut General Assembly Joint Committee on Legislative Management Legislative Office Building : Rm 5100 Hartford, CT 06106 (860) 240 – 0100 FAX: (860) 240 – 0122

1. Provide all labor and materials required to upgrade the mechanical systems at the Legislative Office Building First Floor as per the drawings and specifications: $___________

Standard payment terms are net 45 days. Please indicate any early payment discount terms that would be applicable to this project: ________% Discount, ______ Days. The undersigned, accepting the conditions set forth herein, hereby agrees in strict accordance therewith to furnish these services and/or commodities to the General Assembly as listed in the Request for Proposal at the prices proposed therein. Company: _______________________________________________________________ Address: ________________________________________________________________ Signature: _______________________________________________________________ Name (Printed): _______________________ Title: _____________________________ Federal Employer Identification Number: ______________________________________ Telephone Number: ____________________Fax Number: ________________________ Email Address: ___________________________________________________________ Date: ___________________________________________________________________

NONDISCRIMINATION CERTIFICATION ATTACHMENT E Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building JCLM09REG0019

The Connecticut General Assembly Joint Committee on Legislative Management 300 Capitol Avenue Legislative Office Building – Room 5100 Hartford, CT 06106 (860) 240 – 0100 FAX: (860) 240 - 0122

(To be completed by corporate or other business entity regarding support of nondiscrimination against persons on account of their race, color, religious creed, age, marital or civil union status, national origin, ancestry, sex, mental retardation, physical disability or sexual orientation.) I___________________________________(signer’s name),_____________________________(signer’s title)

of ______________________________(name of entity), an entity lawfully organized and existing under the laws

of___________________________________(name of state or common-wealth), do hereby certify that the

following is a true and correct copy of a resolution adopted on the ______day of _________________, 20__ by

the governing body of __________________________________(name of entity), in accordance with all of its

documents of governance and management and the laws of ____________________________(name of state or

commonwealth), and further certify that such resolution has not been modified, rescinded or revoked, and is, at

present, in full force and effect.

RESOLVED: That ___________________________________(name of entity) hereby adopts as its policy to

support the nondiscrimination agreements and warranties required under Connecticut General Statutes § 4a-

60(a)(1) and § 4a-60a(a)(1), as amended in State of Connecticut Public Act 07-245 and sections 9(a)(1) and

10(a)(1) of Public Act 07-142.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has executed this certificate this ____ day of __________________, 20__. By :__________________________________ Print Name: Title: _________________________________

(To be completed by individual contractor regarding support of nondiscrimination against persons on account of their race, color, religious creed, age, marital or civil union status, national origin, ancestry, sex, mental retardation, physical disability or sexual orientation.) I ________________________________ (signer’s name) of _________________________________ (business

address) am entering into a contract (or an extension or other modification of an existing contract) with the State

of Connecticut (the “State”) in my individual capacity for _____________________________________(If

available, insert “Contract No. ___”; otherwise generally describe goods or services to be provided). In order to

induce the State to consummate said contract, I hereby certify that I support the nondiscrimination agreements and

warranties required under Connecticut General Statutes Sections 4a-60(a)(1) and 4a-60a(a)(1), as amended in

State of Connecticut Public Act 07-245 and sections 9(a)(1) and 10(a)(1) of Public Act 07-142.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has executed this certificate this _____ day of __________________, 20___. ___________________________________ Print Name:

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ATTACHMENT F Fresh Air/Mechanical Upgrades at the Legislative Office Building JCLM09REG0019

The Connecticut General Assembly Joint Committee on Legislative Management Legislative Office Building : Rm 5100 Hartford, CT 06106 (860) 240 – 0100 FAX: (860) 240 – 0122

Please Note: An insurance certificate is not required to be submitted with the proposal but is required upon

contract award. 1. The successful proposer shall carry in force for the duration of this agreement the following insurance:

(a) All statutory insurance, i.e. worker’s compensation and unemployment insurance. (b) Bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of his employees; bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other then his employees and claims insured by usual personal injury liability coverage. (c) Damage because of injury to, disappearance, or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom. (d) Professional Liability

2. The Comprehensive General Liability Limits Shall Be: Bodily Injury: $500,000 each person, $1,000,000 each occurrence Property Damage: $1,000,000 each occurrence

3. Automobile and/or truck use on the premises for deliveries, etc., shall require Comprehensive Automobile Insurance with coverage not less than:

Bodily Injury: $500,000 each person, $1,000,000 each occurrence Property Damage: $1,000,000 each occurrence

4. Professional Liability including environmental coverage not less than (if applicable):

Ea. Claim $1,000,000 Aggregate $2,000,000 Ea. Claim Ded. $25,000

For this professional liability coverage, the aggregate limit is the total insurance available for claims presented within the policy period for all operations of the insured. This limit will be reduced by payments of claims & expenses. This insurance is not for a specific project.

5. The insurance certificate shall indicate that the contractor name the Joint Committee on Legislative management

as an additional insured and shall defend and save harmless the Joint Committee on Legislative Management from actions, suits, or other legal proceedings that may be instituted on such claims or demands.

6. The insurance certificate shall also indicate that policies may not be canceled without at least 15 days prior

notice to the Joint Committee on Legislative Management. 7. The successful vendor shall deliver to the Joint Committee on Legislative Management all required certificates

of insurance upon award of the contract as well as an endorsement indicating that the Joint Committee on Legislative management has been added to the policy as an additional insured

STATE OF CONNECTICUT - AGENCY VENDOR FORM SP-26NB Rev. 4/03

IMPORTANT: ALL parts of this form must be completed, signed and returned by the vendor.

READ & COMPLETE CAREFULLY

COMPLETE VENDOR LEGAL BUSINESS NAME

Taxpayer ID # (TIN): SSN FEIN

WRITE/TYPE SSN/FEIN NUMBER ABOVE

BUSINESS NAME , TRADE NAME, DOING BUSINESS AS (IF DIFFERENT FROM ABOVE) BUSINESS ENTITY: CORPORATION LLC CORPORATION LLC PARTNERSHIP LLC SINGLE MEMBER ENTITY NON-PROFIT PARTNERSHIP INDIVIDUAL/SOLE PROPRIETOR NOTE: IF INDIVIDUAL/SOLE PROPRIETOR, INDIVIDUAL’S NAME (AS OWNER) MUST APPEAR IN THE LEGAL BUSINESS NAME BLOCK ABOVE.BUSINESS TYPE: A. SALE OF COMMODITIES B. MEDICAL SERVICES C. ATTORNEY FEES D. RENTAL OF PROPERTY (REAL ESTATE & EQUIPMENT) E. OTHER (DESCRIBE IN DETAIL)

UNDER THIS TIN, WHAT IS THE PRIMARY TYPE OF BUSINESS YOU PROVIDE TO THE STATE? (ENTER LETTER FROM ABOVE) ➙

UNDER THIS TIN, WHAT OTHER TYPES OF BUSINESS MIGHT YOU PROVIDE TO THE STATE? (ENTER LETTER FROM ABOVE) ➙

NOTE: IF YOUR BUSINESS IS A PARTNERSHIP, YOU MUST ATTACH THE NAMES AND TITLES OF ALL PARTNERS TO YOUR BID SUBMISSION. NOTE: IF YOUR BUSINESS IS A CORPORATION, IN WHICH STATE ARE YOU INCORPORATED? VENDOR ADDRESS STREET CITY STATE ZIP CODE

Add Additional Business Address & Contact information on back of this form.

VENDOR E-MAIL ADDRESS

VENDOR WEB SITE

REMITTANCE INFORMATION: INDICATE BELOW THE REMITTANCE ADDRESS OF YOUR BUSINESS. SAME AS VENDOR ADDRESS ABOVE. REMIT ADDRESS STREET CITY STATE ZIP CODE

CONTACT INFORMATION: NAME (TYPE OR PRINT) 1ST BUSINESS PHONE: Ext. # HOME PHONE: 2ND BUSINESS PHONE: Ext. # 1ST PAGER: CELLULAR: 2ND PAGER: 1ST FAX NUMBER: TOLL FREE PHONE: 2ND FAX NUMBER: TELEX: WRITTEN SIGNATURE OF PERSON AUTHORIZED TO SIGN PROPOSALS ON BEHALF OF THE ABOVE NAMED VENDOR

!SIGN HERE

DATE EXECUTED

TYPE OR PRINT NAME OF AUTHORIZED PERSON

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED PERSON

IS YOUR BUSINESS CURRENTLY A DAS CERTIFIED SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE? YES (ATTACH COPY OF CERTIFICATE) NO IF YOU ARE A STATE EMPLOYEE, INDICATE YOUR POSITION, AGENCY & AGENCY ADDRESS

FOR PURCHASE ORDER DISTRIBUTION: 1) CHECK ONLY ONE BOX BELOW 2) INPUT E-MAIL ADDRESS OR FAX # (IF CHECKED) E-MAIL FAX USPS MAIL EDI

If EDI was selected, give us a person to contact in your company to set up EDI: NAME: E-MAIL ADDRESS: TELEPHONE NUMBER: FOR REQUEST FOR QUOTATION (RFQ) DISTRIBUTION: 1) CHECK ONLY ONE BOX BELOW 2) INPUT E-MAIL ADDRESS OR FAX # (IF CHECKED) E-MAIL FAX USPS MAIL

ADD FURTHER BUSINESS ADDRESS, E-MAIL & CONTACT INFORMATION ON SEPARATE SHEET IF REQUIRED

ATTACHMENT G

Give form to therequester. Do notsend to the IRS.

Form W-9 Request for TaxpayerIdentification Number and Certification(Rev. January 2003)

Department of the TreasuryInternal Revenue Service

Name

List account number(s) here (optional)

Address (number, street, and apt. or suite no.)

City, state, and ZIP code

Pri

nt o

r ty

pe

See

Sp

ecifi

c In

stru

ctio

ns o

n p

age

2.

Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN)

Enter your TIN in the appropriate box. For individuals, this is your social security number (SSN).However, for a resident alien, sole proprietor, or disregarded entity, see the Part I instructions onpage 3. For other entities, it is your employer identification number (EIN). If you do not have a number,see How to get a TIN on page 3.

Social security number

––or

Requester’s name and address (optional)

Employer identification numberNote: If the account is in more than one name, see the chart on page 4 for guidelines on whose numberto enter. –

Certification

1. The number shown on this form is my correct taxpayer identification number (or I am waiting for a number to be issued to me), and

I am not subject to backup withholding because: (a) I am exempt from backup withholding, or (b) I have not been notified by the InternalRevenue Service (IRS) that I am subject to backup withholding as a result of a failure to report all interest or dividends, or (c) the IRS hasnotified me that I am no longer subject to backup withholding, and

2.

Certification instructions. You must cross out item 2 above if you have been notified by the IRS that you are currently subject to backupwithholding because you have failed to report all interest and dividends on your tax return. For real estate transactions, item 2 does not apply.For mortgage interest paid, acquisition or abandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt, contributions to an individual retirementarrangement (IRA), and generally, payments other than interest and dividends, you are not required to sign the Certification, but you mustprovide your correct TIN. (See the instructions on page 4.)

SignHere

Signature ofU.S. person � Date �

Purpose of Form

Form W-9 (Rev. 1-2003)

Part I

Part II

Business name, if different from above

Cat. No. 10231X

Check appropriate box:

Under penalties of perjury, I certify that:

U.S. person. Use Form W-9 only if you are a U.S. person(including a resident alien), to provide your correct TIN to theperson requesting it (the requester) and, when applicable, to:

1. Certify that the TIN you are giving is correct (or you arewaiting for a number to be issued),

2. Certify that you are not subject to backup withholding,or

3. Claim exemption from backup withholding if you are aU.S. exempt payee.

Foreign person. If you are a foreign person, use theappropriate Form W-8 (see Pub. 515, Withholding of Tax onNonresident Aliens and Foreign Entities).

3. I am a U.S. person (including a U.S. resident alien).

A person who is required to file an information return withthe IRS, must obtain your correct taxpayer identificationnumber (TIN) to report, for example, income paid to you, realestate transactions, mortgage interest you paid, acquisitionor abandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt, orcontributions you made to an IRA.

Individual/Sole proprietor Corporation Partnership Other �

Exempt from backupwithholding

Note: If a requester gives you a form other than Form W-9to request your TIN, you must use the requester’s form if it issubstantially similar to this Form W-9.

Nonresident alien who becomes a resident alien.Generally, only a nonresident alien individual may use theterms of a tax treaty to reduce or eliminate U.S. tax oncertain types of income. However, most tax treaties contain aprovision known as a “saving clause.” Exceptions specifiedin the saving clause may permit an exemption from tax tocontinue for certain types of income even after the recipienthas otherwise become a U.S. resident alien for tax purposes.

If you are a U.S. resident alien who is relying on anexception contained in the saving clause of a tax treaty toclaim an exemption from U.S. tax on certain types of income,you must attach a statement that specifies the following fiveitems:

1. The treaty country. Generally, this must be the sametreaty under which you claimed exemption from tax as anonresident alien.

2. The treaty article addressing the income.3. The article number (or location) in the tax treaty that

contains the saving clause and its exceptions.4. The type and amount of income that qualifies for the

exemption from tax.5. Sufficient facts to justify the exemption from tax under

the terms of the treaty article.

ATTACHMENT H

Form W-9 (Rev. 1-2003) Page 2

Sole proprietor. Enter your individual name as shown onyour social security card on the “Name” line. You may enteryour business, trade, or “doing business as (DBA)” name onthe “Business name” line.

Other entities. Enter your business name as shown onrequired Federal tax documents on the “Name” line. Thisname should match the name shown on the charter or otherlegal document creating the entity. You may enter anybusiness, trade, or DBA name on the “Business name” line.

If the account is in joint names, list first, and then circle,the name of the person or entity whose number you enteredin Part I of the form.

Limited liability company (LLC). If you are a single-memberLLC (including a foreign LLC with a domestic owner) that isdisregarded as an entity separate from its owner underTreasury regulations section 301.7701-3, enter the owner’sname on the “Name” line. Enter the LLC’s name on the“Business name” line.

Specific Instructions

Name

Exempt From Backup Withholding

Generally, individuals (including sole proprietors) are notexempt from backup withholding. Corporations are exemptfrom backup withholding for certain payments, such asinterest and dividends.

5. You do not certify to the requester that you are notsubject to backup withholding under 4 above (for reportableinterest and dividend accounts opened after 1983 only).

Certain payees and payments are exempt from backupwithholding. See the instructions below and the separateInstructions for the Requester of Form W-9.

Civil penalty for false information with respect towithholding. If you make a false statement with noreasonable basis that results in no backup withholding, youare subject to a $500 penalty.Criminal penalty for falsifying information. Willfullyfalsifying certifications or affirmations may subject you tocriminal penalties including fines and/or imprisonment.

PenaltiesFailure to furnish TIN. If you fail to furnish your correct TINto a requester, you are subject to a penalty of $50 for eachsuch failure unless your failure is due to reasonable causeand not to willful neglect.

Misuse of TINs. If the requester discloses or uses TINs inviolation of Federal law, the requester may be subject to civiland criminal penalties.

If you are an individual, you must generally enter the nameshown on your social security card. However, if you havechanged your last name, for instance, due to marriagewithout informing the Social Security Administration of thename change, enter your first name, the last name shown onyour social security card, and your new last name.

Exempt payees. Backup withholding is not required on anypayments made to the following payees:

1. An organization exempt from tax under section 501(a),any IRA, or a custodial account under section 403(b)(7) if theaccount satisfies the requirements of section 401(f)(2);

2. The United States or any of its agencies orinstrumentalities;

3. A state, the District of Columbia, a possession of theUnited States, or any of their political subdivisions orinstrumentalities;

4. A foreign government or any of its political subdivisions,agencies, or instrumentalities; or

5. An international organization or any of its agencies orinstrumentalities.

Other payees that may be exempt from backupwithholding include:

6. A corporation;7. A foreign central bank of issue;8. A dealer in securities or commodities required to register

in the United States, the District of Columbia, or apossession of the United States;

If you are exempt, enter your name as described above andcheck the appropriate box for your status, then check the“Exempt from backup withholding” box in the line followingthe business name, sign and date the form.

4. The IRS tells you that you are subject to backupwithholding because you did not report all your interest anddividends on your tax return (for reportable interest anddividends only), or

3. The IRS tells the requester that you furnished anincorrect TIN, or

2. You do not certify your TIN when required (see the PartII instructions on page 4 for details), or

You will not be subject to backup withholding on paymentsyou receive if you give the requester your correct TIN, makethe proper certifications, and report all your taxable interestand dividends on your tax return.

1. You do not furnish your TIN to the requester, or

What is backup withholding? Persons making certainpayments to you must under certain conditions withhold andpay to the IRS 30% of such payments (29% after December31, 2003; 28% after December 31, 2005). This is called“backup withholding.” Payments that may be subject tobackup withholding include interest, dividends, broker andbarter exchange transactions, rents, royalties, nonemployeepay, and certain payments from fishing boat operators. Realestate transactions are not subject to backup withholding.

Payments you receive will be subject to backupwithholding if:

If you are a nonresident alien or a foreign entity notsubject to backup withholding, give the requester theappropriate completed Form W-8.

Example. Article 20 of the U.S.-China income tax treatyallows an exemption from tax for scholarship incomereceived by a Chinese student temporarily present in theUnited States. Under U.S. law, this student will become aresident alien for tax purposes if his or her stay in the UnitedStates exceeds 5 calendar years. However, paragraph 2 ofthe first Protocol to the U.S.-China treaty (dated April 30,1984) allows the provisions of Article 20 to continue to applyeven after the Chinese student becomes a resident alien ofthe United States. A Chinese student who qualifies for thisexception (under paragraph 2 of the first protocol) and isrelying on this exception to claim an exemption from tax onhis or her scholarship or fellowship income would attach toForm W-9 a statement that includes the informationdescribed above to support that exemption.

Note: You are requested to check the appropr iate box foryour status (individual/sole propr ietor, corporation, etc. ).

Note: If you are exempt from backup withholding, you shouldstill complete this form to avoid possible erroneous backupwithholding.

ATTACHMENT H

Form W-9 (Rev. 1-2003) Page 3

Part I. Taxpayer IdentificationNumber (TIN)Enter your TIN in the appropriate box. If you are a residentalien and you do not have and are not eligible to get anSSN, your TIN is your IRS individual taxpayer identificationnumber (ITIN). Enter it in the social security number box. Ifyou do not have an ITIN, see How to get a TIN below.

How to get a TIN. If you do not have a TIN, apply for oneimmediately. To apply for an SSN, get Form SS-5,Application for a Social Security Card, from your local SocialSecurity Administration office or get this form on-line atwww.ssa.gov/online/ss5.html. You may also get this formby calling 1-800-772-1213. Use Form W-7, Application forIRS Individual Taxpayer Identification Number, to apply for anITIN, or Form SS-4, Application for Employer IdentificationNumber, to apply for an EIN. You can get Forms W-7 andSS-4 from the IRS by calling 1-800-TAX-FORM(1-800-829-3676) or from the IRS Web Site at www.irs.gov.

If you are asked to complete Form W-9 but do not have aTIN, write “Applied For” in the space for the TIN, sign anddate the form, and give it to the requester. For interest anddividend payments, and certain payments made with respectto readily tradable instruments, generally you will have 60days to get a TIN and give it to the requester before you aresubject to backup withholding on payments. The 60-day ruledoes not apply to other types of payments. You will besubject to backup withholding on all such payments until youprovide your TIN to the requester.

If you are a sole proprietor and you have an EIN, you mayenter either your SSN or EIN. However, the IRS prefers thatyou use your SSN.

If you are a single-owner LLC that is disregarded as anentity separate from its owner (see Limited liabilitycompany (LLC) on page 2), enter your SSN (or EIN, if youhave one). If the LLC is a corporation, partnership, etc., enterthe entity’s EIN.Note: See the chart on page 4 for further clar ification ofname and TIN combinations.

Note: Writing “Applied For” means that you have alreadyapplied for a TIN or that you intend to apply for one soon.Caution: A disregarded domestic entity that has a foreignowner must use the appropr iate Form W-8.

9. A futures commission merchant registered with theCommodity Futures Trading Commission;

10. A real estate investment trust;11. An entity registered at all times during the tax year

under the Investment Company Act of 1940;12. A common trust fund operated by a bank under

section 584(a);13. A financial institution;14. A middleman known in the investment community as a

nominee or custodian; or15. A trust exempt from tax under section 664 or

described in section 4947.

THEN the payment is exemptfor . . .

If the payment is for . . .

All exempt recipients except for 9

Interest and dividend payments

Exempt recipients 1 through 13.Also, a person registered underthe Investment Advisers Act of1940 who regularly acts as abroker

Broker transactions

Exempt recipients 1 through 5Barter exchange transactionsand patronage dividends

Generally, exempt recipients1 through 7 2

Payments over $600 requiredto be reported and directsales over $5,000 1

1 See Form 1099-MISC, Miscellaneous Income, and its instructions.2 However, the following payments made to a corporation (including grossproceeds paid to an attorney under section 6045(f), even if the attorney is acorporation) and reportable on Form 1099-MISC are not exempt from backupwithholding: medical and health care payments, attorneys’ fees; and paymentsfor services paid by a Federal executive agency.

The chart below shows types of payments that may beexempt from backup withholding. The chart applies to theexempt recipients listed above, 1 through 15.

ATTACHMENT H

Form W-9 (Rev. 1-2003) Page 4

What Name and Number To Give theRequester

Give name and SSN of:For this type of account:

The individual1. Individual

The actual owner of the accountor, if combined funds, the firstindividual on the account 1

2. Two or more individuals (jointaccount)

The minor 23. Custodian account of a minor(Uniform Gift to Minors Act)

The grantor-trustee 14. a. The usual revocablesavings trust (grantor isalso trustee)

1. Interest, dividend, and barter exchange accountsopened before 1984 and broker accounts consideredactive during 1983. You must give your correct TIN, but youdo not have to sign the certification.

The actual owner 1b. So-called trust accountthat is not a legal or validtrust under state law2. Interest, dividend, broker, and barter exchange

accounts opened after 1983 and broker accountsconsidered inactive during 1983. You must sign thecertification or backup withholding will apply. If you aresubject to backup withholding and you are merely providingyour correct TIN to the requester, you must cross out item 2in the certification before signing the form.

The owner 35. Sole proprietorship orsingle-owner LLC

Give name and EIN of:For this type of account:

3. Real estate transactions. You must sign thecertification. You may cross out item 2 of the certification.

A valid trust, estate, orpension trust

6.

Legal entity 4

4. Other payments. You must give your correct TIN, butyou do not have to sign the certification unless you havebeen notified that you have previously given an incorrect TIN.“Other payments” include payments made in the course ofthe requester’s trade or business for rents, royalties, goods(other than bills for merchandise), medical and health careservices (including payments to corporations), payments to anonemployee for services, payments to certain fishing boatcrew members and fishermen, and gross proceeds paid toattorneys (including payments to corporations).

The corporationCorporate or LLC electingcorporate status on Form8832

7.

The organizationAssociation, club, religious,charitable, educational, orother tax-exempt organization

8.

5. Mortgage interest paid by you, acquisition orabandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt,qualified tuition program payments (under section 529),IRA or Archer MSA contributions or distributions, andpension distributions. You must give your correct TIN, butyou do not have to sign the certification.

The partnershipPartnership or multi-memberLLC

9.

The broker or nomineeA broker or registerednominee

10.

The public entityAccount with the Departmentof Agriculture in the name ofa public entity (such as astate or local government,school district, or prison) thatreceives agricultural programpayments

11.

Privacy Act Notice

1 List first and circle the name of the person whose number you furnish. If onlyone person on a joint account has an SSN, that person’s number must befurnished.2 Circle the minor’s name and furnish the minor’s SSN.3 You must show your individual name, but you may also enter yourbusiness or “DBA” name. You may use either your SSN or EIN (if you haveone).4 List first and circle the name of the legal trust, estate, or pension trust. (Donot furnish the TIN of the personal representative or trustee unless the legalentity itself is not designated in the account title.)

Note: If no name is circled when more than one name islisted, the number will be considered to be that of the firstname listed.

Sole proprietorship orsingle-owner LLC

The owner 3

12.

Part II. Certification

For a joint account, only the person whose TIN is shown inPart I should sign (when required). Exempt recipients, seeExempt from backup withholding on page 2.

You must provide your TIN whether or not you are required to file a tax return. Payers must generally withhold 30% of taxableinterest, dividend, and certain other payments to a payee who does not give a TIN to a payer. Certain penalties may also apply.

To establish to the withholding agent that you are a U.S.person, or resident alien, sign Form W-9. You may berequested to sign by the withholding agent even if items 1, 3,and 5 below indicate otherwise.

Section 6109 of the Internal Revenue Code requires you to provide your correct TIN to persons who must file information returnswith the IRS to report interest, dividends, and certain other income paid to you, mortgage interest you paid, the acquisition orabandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt, or contributions you made to an IRA or Archer MSA. The IRS uses thenumbers for identification purposes and to help verify the accuracy of your tax return. The IRS may also provide this informationto the Department of Justice for civil and criminal litigation, and to cities, states, and the District of Columbia to carry out theirtax laws. We may also disclose this information to other countries under a tax treaty, or to Federal and state agencies to enforceFederal nontax criminal laws and to combat terrorism.

Signature requirements. Complete the certification asindicated in 1 through 5 below.

ATTACHMENT H

ATTACHMENT I

REQUEST FOR DRAWING FORM The undersigned requests a copy of Project Drawings for FRESH AIR AND MECHANICAL UPGRADES AT THE LEGISLATIVE OFFICE BUILDING (Drawings MEP-1 and Cover Sheet entitled “Legislative Office Building - Fresh Air Study”) as specified in the Request for Proposal issued by the Connecticut General Assembly. There is no deposit required to obtain these forms and they do not need to be returned. Vendor Name: _____________________________________________________________________________ (company) Vendor Address: _____________________________________________________________________________ (street, town, state, zip code) Vendor SSN/FEIN: _____________________________________________________________________________ Telephone Number: _____________________________________________________________________________ Fax Number: _____________________________________________________________________________ Email Address: _____________________________________________________________________________ Contact Name: _____________________________________________________________________________ For use by the Office of Legislative Management: ____________________________________________ Date drawing request form received by OLM ____________________________________________ Date drawings picked up/mailed

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

Minimum Rates and Classifications for Building Construction B 11094 Connecticut Department of Labor Wage and Workplace Standards Division

By virtue of the authority vested in the Labor Commissioner under provisions of Section 31-53 of the General Statutes of Connecticut, as amended, the following are declared to be the prevailing rates and welfare payments and will apply only where the contract is advertised for bid within 20 days of the date on which the rates are established. Any contractor or subcontractor not obligated by agreement to pay to the welfare and pension fund shall pay this amount to each employee as part of his/her hourly wages. Project Number JCLM09REG0019 Project Town Hartford Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

CLASSIFICATION Hourly Rate Benefits 1a) Asbestos Worker/Insulator (Includes application of insulating 32.21 19.20 materials, protective coverings, coatings, & finishes to all types of mechanical systems; application of firestopping material for wall openings & penetrations in walls, floors, ceilings. 1b) Asbestos/Toxic Waste Removal Laborers: Asbestos removal and encapsulation (except its removal from mechanical systems which are not to be scrapped), toxic waste removers, blasters.**See Laborers Group 7** 1c) Hazardous Material Handler: Includes preparation, wetting, 20.50 10.30 stripping, removal, scrapping, vacuuming, bagging and disposing of all insulation materials, whether they contain asbestos or not, from mechanical systems. 2) Boilermaker 32.73 8.72 + 33%

3a) Bricklayer, Cement Mason, Cement Finishers, Plasterers, Stone 31.00 18.54 + a Masons

3b) Tile Setter 30.21 16.61

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

3c) Terrazzo Workers, Marble Setters 30.30 18.69

3d) Tile, Marble & Terrazzo Finishers 24.50 14.43

------LABORERS------

4) Group 1: Laborers, carpenter tenders, wrecking laborers, fire 23.25 14.00 watchers.

4a) Group 2: Mortar mixers, plaster tenders, power buggy 23.50 14.00 operators, powdermen, fireproofer/mixer/nozzleman.

4b) Group 3: Jackhammer operators, mason tenders. 23.75 14.00

4c) **Group 4: Pipelayers (Installation of water, storm drainage or 24.10 14.00 sewage lines outside of the building line with P6, P7 license) [If using this classification call the Labor Department for clarification]

4d) Group 5: Air track operators, Sand blasters. 24.50 14.00

4e) Group 6: Nuclear toxic waste removers, blasters. 26.25 14.00

4f) Group 7: Asbestos removal and encapsulation (except it's 24.25 14.00 removal from mechanical systems which are not to be scrapped).

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

4g) Group 8: Bottom men on open air caisson, cylindrical work and 23.75 14.00 boring crew.

4h) Group 9: Top men on open air caisson, cylindrical work and 23.25 14.00 boring crew.

5) Carpenter, Acoustical Tile Worker, Concrete Form-Wood 27.90 16.96 Builder, Floor Covering (Including Drywall Hanging), Modular-Furniture Systems Installers, Lathers, Piledrivers, Resilient Floor Layers. 5a) Millwrights 28.65 16.96

6) Electrical Worker, Cable Splicer (electric) (Trade License 34.40 18.57 required: E1,2 L-5,6 C-5,6 T-1,2 L-1,2 V-1,2,7,8,9)

7a) Elevator Mechanic (Trade License required: R-1,2,5,6) 41.34 16.285+a+b

8) Glazier (Trade License required: FG-1,2) 31.43 14.00 + a

9) Ironworker, Ornamental, Reinforcing, Structural, and Precast 31.80 23.18 Concrete Erection

----OPERATORS----

Group 1: Crane handling or erecting structural steel or stone, 33.05 16.90 + a hoisting engineer 2 drums or over, front end loader (7 cubic yards or over); work boat 26 ft. and over.

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

Group 2: Cranes (100 ton rate capacity and over); Excavator over 32.73 16.90 + a 2 cubic yards; Piledriver ($3.00 premium when operator controls hammer)

Group 3: Excavator; Cranes (under 100 ton rated capacity), 31.99 16.90 + a Gradall; Master Mechanic; Hoisting Engineer (all types of equipment where a drum and cable are used to hoist or drag material regardless of motive power of operation), Rubber Tire Excavator (Drott-1085 Group 4: Trenching Machines; Lighter Derrick; Concrete Finishing 31.60 16.90 + a Machine; CMI Machine or Similar; Koehring Loader (Skooper)

Group 5: Specialty Railroad Equipment; Asphalt Spreader; Asphalt 31.01 16.90 + a Reclaiming Machine; Line Grinder; Concrete Pumps; Drills with Self Contained Power Units; Boring Machine; Post Hole Digger; Auger; Pounder; Well Digger; Milling Machine (over 24" Mandrell) Group 5 continued: Side Boom; Combination Hoe and Loader; 31.01 16.90 + a Directional Driller.

Group 6: Front End Loader (3 up to 7 cubic yards); Bulldozer 30.70 16.90 + a (rough grade dozer).

Group 7: Asphalt roller, concrete saws and cutters (ride on types), 30.36 16.90 + a vermeer concrete cutter, Stump Grinder; Scraper; Snooper; Skidder; Milling Machine (24" and under Mandrell).

Group 8: Mechanic, grease truck operator, hydroblaster; barrier 29.96 16.90 + a mover; power stone spreader; welding; work boat under 26 ft.; transfer machine.

Group 9: Front end loader (under 3 cubic yards), skid steer loader 29.53 16.90 + a regardless of attachments, (Bobcat or Similar): forklift, power chipper; landscape equipment (including Hydroseeder).

Group 10: Vibratory hammer; ice machine; diesel and air, hammer, 27.49 16.90 + a etc.

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

Group 11: Conveyor, earth roller, power pavement breaker 27.49 16.90 + a (whiphammer), robot demolition equipment.

Group 12: Wellpoint operator. 27.43 16.90 + a

Group 13: Compressor battery operator. 26.85 16.90 + a

Group 14: Elevator operator; tow motor operator (solid tire no 25.71 16.90 + a rough terrain).

Group 15: Generator Operator; Compressor Operator; Pump 25.30 16.90 + a Operator; Welding Machine Operator; Heater Operator.

Group 16: Maintenance engineer. 24.65 16.90 + a

Group 17: Portable asphalt plant operator; portable crusher plant 28.96 16.90 + a operator; portable concrete plant operator.

Group 18: Power safety boat; vacuum truck; zim mixer; sweeper; 26.54 16.90 + a (Minimum for any job requiring a CDL license).

------PAINTERS (Including Drywall Finishing)------

10a) Brush, Roller 27.87 14.00

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

10b) Taper 28.62 14.00

10c) Paperhanger 28.37 14.00

10d) Red Label 28.37 14.00

10e) Blast and Spray 30.87 14.00

10f) Tanks, Tower, Swingstage 29.87 14.00

11) Plumber (Trade License required: 35.37 19.71 P-1,2,6,7,8,9 J-1,2,3,4 SP-1,2)

12) Post Digger, Well Digger, Pile Testing Machine 25.25 9.05 + a

13) Roofer (composition) 29.40 13.48

14) Roofer (slate & tile) 29.90 13.48

15) Sheetmetal Worker (Trade License required for HVAC and 29.55 23.15 Ductwork: SM-1,SM-2,SM-3,SM-4,SM-5,SM-6)

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

16) Pipefitter (Including HVAC work) 35.37 19.71 (Trade License required: S-1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 B-1,2,3,4 D-1,2,3,4, G-1, G-2, G-8 & G-9)

------TRUCK DRIVERS------

17a) 2 Axle 26.18 12.47 + a

17b) 3 Axle, 2 Axle Ready Mix 26.28 12.47 + a

17c) 3 Axle Ready Mix 26.33 12.47 + a

17d) 4 Axle, Heavy Duty Trailer up to 40 tons 26.38 12.47 + a

17e) 4 Axle Ready Mix 26.43 12.47 + a

17f) Heavy Duty Trailer (40 Tons and Over) 26.63 12.47 + a

17g) Specialized Earth Moving Equipment (Other Than 26.43 12.47 + a Conventional Type on-the-Road Trucks and Semi-Trailers, Including Euclids)

18) Sprinkler Fitter (Trade License required: F-1,2,3,4) 36.50 15.10 + a

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

Welders: Rate for craft to which welding is incidental. *Note: Hazardous waste removal work receives additional $1.50 per hour for power equipment operators and $1.25 per hour for truck drivers. **Note: Hazardous waste premium $3.00 per hour over classified rate Crane with 150 ft. boom (including jib) - $1.50 extra Crane with 200 ft. boom (including jib) - $2.50 extra Crane with 250 ft. boom (including jib) - $5.00 extra Crane with 300 ft. boom (including jib) - $7.00 extra Crane with 400 ft. boom (including jib) - $10.00

All classifications that indicate a percentage of the fringe benefits must be calculated at the percentage rate times the "base hourly rate".

Apprentices duly registered under the Commissioner of Labor's regulations on "Work Training Standards for Apprenticeship and Training Programs" Section 31-51-d-1 to 12, are allowed to be paid the appropriate percentage of the prevailing journeymen hourly base and the full fringe benefit rate, providing the work site ratio shall not be less than one full-time journeyperson instructing and supervising the work of each apprentice in a specific trade.

The Prevailing wage rates applicable to this project are subject to annual adjustments each July 1st for the duration of the project. Each contractor shall pay the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate that is in effect each July 1st, as posted by the Department of Labor. It is the contractor's responsibility to obtain the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate increases directly from the Department of Labor's website. The annual adjustments will be posted on the Department of Labor's Web page: www.ct.gov/dol The Department of Labor will continue to issue the initial prevailing wage rate schedule to the Contracting Agency for the project. All subsequent annual adjustments will be posted on our Web Site for contractor access.

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

Project: Legislative Office Building Fresh Air And Mechanical Upgrades

Effective October 1, 2005 - Public Act 05-50: any person performing the work of any mechanic, laborer, or worker shall be paid prevailing wage All Person who perform work ON SITE must be paid prevailing wage for the appropriate mechanic, laborer, or worker classification.

All certified payrolls must list the hours worked and wages paid to All Persons who perform work ON SITE regardless of their ownership i.e.: (Owners, Corporate Officers, LLC Members, Independent Contractors, extra et. al) Reporting and payment of wages is required regardless of any contractual relationship alleged to exist between the contractor and such person. Please direct any questions which you may have pertaining to classification of work and payment of prevailing wages to the Wage and Workplace Standards Division, telephone (860)263-6790.

As of: Monday, June 30, 2008

ATTACHMENT J

ATTACHMENT K

ATTACHMENT K

ATTACHMENT K

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study Page-1 Specification List Hartford, Connecticut

Project Name Legislative Office Building - Fresh Air Study

Project Number 21-07-157

Drawing Submission / Date January 16, 2008

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

15010 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades 15058 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 15062 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15074 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15077 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15083 HVAC Insulation 15110 Valves 15124 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 15181 Hydronic Piping 15763 Fan-Coil Units 15815 Metal Ducts 15820 Duct Accessories 15838 Power Ventilators 15855 Diffusers and Grilles 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls 15940 Sequence of Operations 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16010 General Conditions for Electrical Trades 16051 Common Work Results for Electrical 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16075 Electrical Identification 16120 Conductors and Cables 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-1 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES SECTION 15010

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of this Division and are to be considered a part of this Contract.

B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are repeated in other Sections of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated therein.

C. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under each Section of Division 15.

D. The following information contains specifications of Work in connection with, and in addition to, this Division:

1. All drawings associated with the project. 2. All specifications associated with the project.

E. Division of work responsibilities shall be as defined and directed by the Bidding Agent and/or the Bidding General Contractor.

1.2 INTENT

A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation.

B. Furnish, deliver and install any apparatus, appliance, material or Work not shown on Drawings but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the Work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, under their respective Section without additional expense to the Owner.

C. Include in the work minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and operation, as though they were hereinafter shown or specified.

D. Provide Engineer written notice of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of Work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that Work under each Section has included the cost of all

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-2 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

required items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation.

E. The Work indicated is diagrammatic. The Engineer may require as part of this Contract, the relocation of devices to reasonable distances from the general locations shown.

F. Verbal clarifications of the Drawings or Specifications during the bid period are not to be relied upon. Refer any questions or clarifications to the Engineer at least five Working days prior to bidding to allow for issuance of an addendum. After the five-day deadline, Bidder must make a decision and qualify the Bid, if the Bidder feels it necessary.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the Contract. (Do not scale the Drawings.)

B. Closely follow Drawings in layout of Work; check Drawings of other Divisions to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom. Where space conditions appear inadequate, Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installations.

C. Engineer may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of the work.

D. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of the Documents, include the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost in the Contract price. The Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner in which the work shall be installed.

1.4 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Before submitting a Bid, the Contractor shall visit the site and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions under which the work will be installed. Contractor will be held responsible for any assumptions, omissions or errors made as a result of failure to become familiar with the site and the Contract Documents.

B. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. All Work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at the site and check the correctness of same as related to the Work.

C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements and those indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, notify the Engineer do not proceed with that Work until instructions have been received from the Engineer.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-3 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The Codes and Standards listed below apply to all Work. Where Codes or Standards are mentioned in these Specifications, follow the latest edition or revision.

B. The current adopted editions of the following State or local Codes apply:

State Building Code, Supplements and referenced publications Life Safety Code NFPA 101 and State Supplements Local Building Code State Fire Safety Code The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1

C. The following Standards shall be used where referenced by the following abbreviations:

AABC Associated Air Balance Council ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists ADC Air Diffusion Council AGA American Gas Association AIA American Institute of Architects AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASE Association of Safety Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CSA Canadian Standards Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturing Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual Insurance Association FSSC Federal Specification HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO Insurance Services Office MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society NBS National Bureau of Standards NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-4 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

NOFI National Oil Fuel Institute NRC National Research Council NSC National Safety Council NSF National Sanitation Foundation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute SAMA Scientific Apparatus Manufacturers Association SBI Steel Boiler Industry (Division of Hydronics Institute) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association STI Steel Tank Institute UL Underwriters' Laboratories

D. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and the requirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction.

E. Include in the Work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and Drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

1.6 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits; pay all Government and State sales taxes and fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the Work. File all necessary Drawings, prepare all Documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments having jurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspections for Work and deliver a copy to the Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the Work.

1.7 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

A. General: This project is in a seismic zone per State and/or Local Codes and Ordinances and all materials and equipment shall be installed, supported, and seismically restrained accordingly. Verify current seismic requirements based on project location and with Code requirements.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of seismic restraints that are similar to those required for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Installation: Installation shall be carried out in strict accordance with the Seismic Engineer’s submittal, current Code, accepted standards and the equipment and material manufacturers’ recommendations.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-5 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Carry out all work in conjunction with other trades and give full cooperation in order that all Work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing other Contractors, especially the General Contractor or Construction Manager, with information as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels, access doors, etc. required by other trades.

B. Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Drawings and mutually arrange Work so as to avoid interference. In general, ductwork, heating piping, sprinkler piping and drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical conduits. The Engineer regarding the arrangement of Work, which cannot be agreed upon by the Contractors, will make final decisions.

C. Where the Work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or will interfere with Work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.

D. If Work is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or so as to cause interference with Work of other Sections, the Contractor causing the interference will make necessary changes to correct the condition without extra charge to the Owner.

E. Prepare coordination drawings and sections clearly showing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades, at no extra charge to the Owner. The Contractor shall prepare coordination drawings at a scale no less than 1/4” = 1’-0”, showing the work of all trades, including but not limited to, the following: proposed ductwork installation in detail, including ceiling heights, duct heights, light fixtures, diffusers, sprinkler piping, electrical distribution conduits, wires, panels and any other electrical work which may conflict with the sheet metal ducts or piping, waste and vent piping, water piping, and rain leaders. The Construction Manager/General Contractor shall coordinate the coordination process between the trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall initiate the coordination drawing basis by providing the approved duct fabrication drawings to the other trades. Regular Contractor Coordination Meetings of all contractors involved shall be held to resolve all conflicts, assure accessibility, coordinate sequences and make adjustment to the layout to achieve the engineering intent of spaces and accessibility.

1.9 ACCEPTANCES

A. The equipment, materials, Workmanship, design and arrangement of all Work installed are subject to the review of the Engineer.

B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, submit to the Engineer for review a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the Work. The intent to use the exact makes specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting such a list.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-6 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipment specified, notify the Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of the awarding of the Contract. In such instances, deviations may be made pending acceptance by the Engineer or the Owner's representative.

C. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured article is specified by reference to the catalog or model number of a manufacturer, the Specifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, verify the duty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where the Contractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent.

D. If material or equipment is installed before shop drawing review, liability for its removal and replacement is assumed by the Contractor, at no extra charge to the Owner, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

E. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject Work in progress shall not be interpreted as acceptance of Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications. Correct Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications whenever non-conformance is discovered.

1.10 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (substitute or provide an equivalent) from the equipment or materials as hereinafter specified, he shall do so by making a request in writing. The Contractor shall state in his request whether it is a substitution or an equivalent to that specified and the amount of credit or extra cost involved. A copy of said request shall be included in the Base Bid with manufacturer's equipment cuts. The Base Bid shall be based on using the materials and equipment as specified and scheduled with no exceptions. Equipment Manufacturers Scheduled on Drawings are considered Base Bid and any other acceptable manufacturers listed in the specifications is considered a substitution and equipment deviation and subject to the requirements for equipment substitution and deviation. When any alternate manufacturer does not qualify acceptable, as determined by the Engineer, provide the Base Bid manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner.

B. In these Specifications and on the accompanying Drawings, one or more makes of materials, apparatus or appliances may have been specified for use in this installation. This has been done for convenience in fixing the standard of workmanship, finish and design required for installation. In the event that only one (1) manufacturer of a product is specified and it is found that the manufacturer has discontinued the product, the Contractor shall use an acceptable equivalent product that meets the requirements of an equivalent product, as noted below, and has all the features of the originally specified product. The details of workmanship, finish and design, and the guaranteed performance of any material, apparatus or appliance which the Contractor desires to deviate for those mentioned herein shall also conform to these standards.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-7 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

C. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for the Engineer's review.

D. Where two or more names are given as equivalents, the Contractor must use the specified item or one of the named equivalents. Where one name only is used and is followed by the words "or acceptable equivalent", the Contractor must use the item named or he may apply for an equipment deviation through the prescribed manner in accordance with this Specification.

E. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as an "accepted equivalent" shall meet the following requirements:

1. The equivalent shall have the same construction features such as, but not limited to:

a. Material thickness, gauge, weight, density, etc. b. Welded, riveted, bolted, etc., construction c. Finish, undercoatings, corrosion protection

2. The equivalent shall perform with the same or better operating efficiency. 3. The equivalent shall have equal or greater reserve capacity. 4. The equivalent shall be locally represented by the manufacturer for service, parts

and technical information. 5. The equivalent shall bear the same labels of performance certification as is

applicable to the specified item, such as AMCA or ARI labels.

F. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified or detailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign and all new drawings and detailing required therefore shall be prepared by the Designers of Record at the expense of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Where such accepted deviation or substitution requires a different quantity and arrangement of piping, ductwork, valves, pumps, insulation, wiring, conduit and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall, with the acceptance by the Engineer, furnish and install any such additional equipment required by the system at no additional cost to the Owner, including any costs added to other trades due to the substitution.

H. The Engineer shall determine if an "accepted equivalent" to a manufacturer listed in the Specifications is considered acceptable.

1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to individual specification sections for additional submittal information.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-8 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

B. The Contractor shall submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment and material specified in each section and coordinated ductwork layouts. No material or equipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has received shop drawings for the particular material or equipment which have been properly reviewed.

C. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 60 days after award of Contract before any material or equipment is purchased. The Contractor shall submit for review copies of all shop drawings to be incorporated in the Contract. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for the quantity of copies required for submission. Where quantities are not specified, provide seven (7) copies for review.

D. Provide shop drawings for all devices specified under equipment specifications for all systems, materials, equipment and/or devices. Shop drawings shall include manufacturers' names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams and other such descriptive data as may be required to identify and accept the equipment. A complete list in each category (example: all fixtures) of all shop drawings, catalog cuts, material lists, etc., shall be submitted to the Engineer at one time. No consideration will be given to a partial shop drawing submittal.

1. Equipment shop drawings shall contain full range performance curves, graphs, tables or other pertinent data which clearly indicates operational range of a given unit size. Computer generated/plotted curves, based solely on design performance, will not be accepted.

2. All specific options and/or alternatives shall be clearly indicated. Failure to do so shall be grounds for rejection.

E. Submittals shall be marked with the trade involved, i.e., HVAC, plumbing, etc. and the specific associated specification section.

1. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a cover sheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or material being submitted.

F. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for review shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract time. No claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed, nor shall the Contractor be entitled to purchase, furnish and/or install equipment which has not been reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall incur all costs associated with delay of construction due to equipment and/or materials arriving late due to late or improper shop drawing submittal.

G. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation work and for the purpose of making adjoining work conform; furnish setting plans and shop details to other trades as required.

H. Acceptance rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does not indicate that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-9 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verify available space prior to submitting shop drawings.

I. Acceptance of shop drawings shall not apply to quantity nor relieve Contractor of his responsibility to comply with intent of Drawings and Specifications.

J. Acceptance of shop drawings is final and no further changes will be allowed without the written consent of the Engineer.

K. Shop drawing submittal sheets which may show items that are not being furnished shall have those items crossed off to clearly indicate which items will be furnished.

L. Bidders shall not rely on any verbal clarification of the Drawings and/or Specifications. Any questions shall be referred to the Engineer at least five (5) working days prior to Bidding to allow for issuance of an Addendum. After the five (5) day deadline, Bidder shall make a decision and qualify the Bid, if the Bidder deems if necessary.

M. Contractor shall make any corrections required by Engineer and shall resubmit required number of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples until accepted. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings to revisions other than corrections requested by Engineer on previous submissions. Engineer shall review no more than one resubmittal of any shop drawing or sample at Owner’s expense. The fees for review of additional resubmittals shall be paid by the Contractor at the Engineer’s standard rates.

1.12 CHANGES IN WORK

A. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after Contracts have been awarded, authorizing a change in the work or an adjustment in the Contract sum or the Contract time. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract sum or the Contract time.

B. All changes in the work shall follow the recommendations of the AIA "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", Article 12.

1.13 MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION

A. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial and model number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. The nameplate of a Contractor or distributor will not be acceptable.

B. All material and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shall bear the label of or be listed by UL, or other accredited authoritative agencies or testing organizations approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-10 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain at the job site a record set of Mechanical Drawings on which any changes in location or routing of all equipment, materials and access panels shall be recorded.

B. At the end of construction, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a complete set of As-Built Drawings, including all updated coordination drawings, ductwork and piping plans. Prepare As-Built documentation utilizing the most recent version of AutoCAD. Provide the Owner with a “CD ROM” disk.

C. If electronic copies of the contract documents are made available to the Contractor for use in production of As-Built documentation, the Contractor assumes responsibility for completeness and accuracy of the As-Built documents. Translation or manipulation of electronic documents provided to the Contractor is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as otherwise specifically indicated, shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail and be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific type or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article as accepted by industry standards shall be furnished.

B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system.

C. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, all equipment and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.

D. All labor for installation of mechanical systems shall be performed by experienced, skilled tradesmen under the supervision of a licensed journeyman foreman. All work shall be of a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in his opinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. The Contractor shall replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to the Owner.

1.16 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen and shall include making good all damage thus caused.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-11 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until the facility has been accepted by the Owner. Protect work against theft, injury or damage and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of foreign material.

C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place and completely connecting equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged.

D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage.

1.17 SUPPORTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary supports required for all equipment furnished under this Division.

B. Unless otherwise shown, all equipment shall be securely attached to the building structure in an acceptable manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature; any attachments that are insufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be replaced as directed without extra cost to the Owner.

C. All equipment supports shall be designed and constructed such that the equipment will be capable of resisting both vertical and horizontal movement. The equipment shall be positively anchored to the bases or supports to resist vertical movement. The equipment and its supports shall be provided with suitable restraints to resist horizontal movement from any direction as dictated by applicable seismic Codes.

1.18 FIRE-STOPS AND SEALS

A. Fire-stopping systems shall be submitted as shop drawing.

B. Penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceiling or floors shall be sealed with a UL approved fire-stop fitting classified for an hourly rating equivalent to the fire rating of the wall, ceiling or floor.

1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting and patching shall be done per Division 1 requirements. The Contractor shall furnish sketches showing the location and sizes of all openings, chases, etc., required for the installation of work.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-12 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

B. Work under this Division shall include furnishing, locating and setting inserts and/or sleeves required before the floors and walls are built or be responsible for cutting, drilling or chopping where sleeves and inserts were not installed or correctly located. The Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.

1.20 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING

A. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises any equipment and apparatus furnished under this Division. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.21 ACCESSIBILITY AND ACCESS PANELS

A. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to: motors, controllers, coil, valves, drain points, etc. Access doors shall be furnished if required for better accessibility. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to allow better accessibility, but changes of magnitude or which involve extra cost shall not be made without the acceptance of the Engineer.

B. Access doors in walls, ceilings, etc., shall be provided and be field coordinated. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and provide information regarding the sizes and quantities of access doors required for his work. The Contractor shall arrange his work in such a manner as to minimize the quantity of access doors required, such as grouping shutoff valves in the same area. Where possible, locate valves in already accessible areas, such as lay-in ceilings, etc.

C. On a clean set of prints, the Contractor shall mark in red pencil the location of each required access door, including its size, and shall submit the print to the Owner for review before access doors are purchased or installed.

D. Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor shall physically demonstrate that all equipment and devices installed have been located and/or provided with adequate access panels for repair, maintenance and/or operation. Any equipment not so furnished shall be relocated or provided with additional access panels by the installing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.22 PIPE EXPANSION

A. All pipe connections shall be installed to allow for freedom of movement of the piping during expansion and contraction without springing. Provide engineered design, layout, details and fabrication, submitted with registered professional engineer sign and seal, of swing joints, expansion loops and expansion joints with proper anchors and guides. Pay particular attention to plastic piping with high coefficients of expansion.

1. Consideration of required seismic lateral restraints shall be given when anchoring piping and making provision for expansion.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-13 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1.23 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified, all wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 16 Specifications.

B. The Contractor furnishing equipment shall furnish the motor controller required for the equipment. Provide properly sized overload heaters and all required accessories with all motor controllers. See Division 16 Motor Controllers for motor controller requirements.

C. All power wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 16 complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box including power wiring through the motor controller and proper means of disconnect per NEC and Division 16. The Division 16 Contractor shall provide all disconnects, unless noted otherwise.

1.24 QUIET OPERATION

A. Equipment and material used in the various systems described herein shall not produce a sound level greater than 55 decibels in the area served. If noise level is deemed objectionable by the Owner/Engineer, the Contractor shall test and record sound levels in the presence of the Owner/Engineer. The sound level shall be observed on the "A" weighting network of a sound level or sound survey meter. The ASHRAE "Guide and Data Book" provides a means to determine sound level of mechanical equipment when the total of background plus equipment sound levels exceeds the minimum acceptable equipment sound level.

B. If objectionable noises or vibrations of any magnitude are produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus, piping, ducts or other parts of the mechanical work, the Contractor shall make such changes or additions as necessary without extra cost to the Owner.

1.25 MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall provide the necessary skilled labor to assure the proper operation and to provide all required current and preventative maintenance for all equipment and controls provided under this Division until final acceptance of the building by the Owner. The Contractor shall not assume acceptance of the building by the Owner until he receives written notification.

B. The Contractor shall receive calls for any and all problems experienced in the operation of the equipment provided under this Division and he shall take steps to immediately correct any deficiencies that may exist.

C. The Contractor shall provide a check list and shall put a copy of it in the main mechanical room. The check list shall itemize each piece of equipment furnished under his Section.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-14 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1. The Contractor shall certify on this check list that he has examined each piece of equipment and that, in his opinion, it is operating as intended by the manufacturer, it has been properly lubricated, and that all necessary current and preventative maintenance has been performed as recommended by the manufacturer and by good and accepted practice.

D. The Contractor shall check controls to ascertain that they are functioning as designed. This portion of the work shall be performed by the Contractor who installed the controls.

1.26 AIR ELIMINATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for bleeding all air from closed hydronic piping systems after the system has been filled, and thereafter rebleeding as often as required to completely eliminate all air from the system.

B. Where work on an existing piping system has allowed air to enter that system, the Contractor shall also bleed that system even if no piping work was done in the area where air has developed.

C. Where air cannot be bled from any piping due to the absence of an air vent, the Contractor shall install a manual air vent in locations required to successfully bleed such air.

D. Where the piping layout would require an air vent in an inaccessible location, the Contractor shall install an extended 1/4-inch copper bleed line and petcock to an accessible location such as a closet, mechanical room, above lay-in ceiling, etc.

1.27 LUBRICATION

A. All equipment installed under this Contract having moving parts and requiring lubrication shall be properly lubricated according to manufacturer's recommendations prior to testing and operation. Any such equipment discovered to have been operated before lubrication by the Contractor is subject to rejection and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner. Units furnished with sealed bearings are exempted.

1.28 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the jobsite clean, safe and neat throughout the duration of construction. The Contractor shall clean up his own debris daily and shall coordinate removal of rubbish and debris with the General Contractor/Construction Manager.

1. No debris, construction materials, cigarette butts, coffee cups, etc., shall be left above suspended ceilings.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-15 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

B. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts and equipment of all foreign substances, oils, burrs, solder, flux, etc., inside and out before being placed in operation.

C. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and/or remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped in an acceptable manner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter.

E. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean.

1.29 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specified under each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, he shall fully instruct the Owner or the Owner's representative in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least 72 hours notice to the Owner and the Engineer in advance of this period.

B. The Contractor shall formally submit for delivery to the Engineer three (3) complete bound sets of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this Division. All instructions shall be submitted in draft for review prior to final issue. Manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instruction.

C. The Contractor, in the above-mentioned instructions, shall include the maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division.

D. The appropriate Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routine maintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assure accessibility to all devices.

E. An authorized manufacturer's representative shall attest in writing that the equipment has been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. The following equipment will require this inspection: pumps; air conditioning equipment, controls, air handling equipment, boilers. These letters will be bound into the operating and maintenance books.

F. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related to operating instructions.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15010-16 General Conditions for Mechanical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

G. The Contractor shall submit to the engineer a signed statement from the owner, confirming that the owner has been fully trained by the contractor in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical equipment and system in accordance with the Specifications, with specific training relative to operation of HVAC systems relative to indoor air quality.

1.30 ADJUSTING AND TESTING

A. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put in final adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer that they are in proper adjustment and in satisfactory, permanent operating condition.

B. Where requested by the Engineer, a factory-trained service engineering representative shall inspect the installation and assist in the initial startup and adjustment to the equipment. The period of these services shall be for such time as necessary to secure proper installation and adjustments. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation, the service engineering representative shall supervise the initial operation of the equipment and instruct the personnel responsible for operation and maintenance of the equipment. The service engineering representative shall notify the Contractor in writing that the equipment was installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and is operating as intended by the manufacturer.

1.31 GUARANTEES

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, material and workmanship under these Specifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by Owner, unless otherwise noted.

B. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materials or workmanship shall be corrected or replaced immediately by the Contractor without expense to the Owner. Such repairs or replacements shall be made to the Engineer's satisfaction.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-1 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15062

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Fastener systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

B. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations.

C. Welding certificates.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-2 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Empire Industries, Inc. 3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 5. Grinnell Corp. 6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Hot dipped after fabrication (ASTM A123 and ASTM A153).

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-3 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

B. Manufacturers:

1. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 2. PHS Industries, Inc. 3. ShowPipe Shields, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Verify suitability for use in lightweight concrete slabs and all slabs less than 4 inches thick.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Powers Fasteners.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Powers Fasteners.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-4 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with hot-dipped galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

7. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

F. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-5 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

G. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

H. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To For supporting insulated pipe without vapor barrier, fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe with vapor barrier.

I. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, provide per Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-6 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

J. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. Verify suitability for use in lightweight concrete slabs and all slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Verify suitability of fasteners in lightweight concrete slabs and all concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-7 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, galvanized protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, galvanized protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees or per thermal hanger insert manufacturer’s recommendations.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following or per thermal hanger insert manufacturer’s recommendations:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15062-8 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15058-1 Common Motor Requirements for Hartford, Connecticut HVAC Equipment

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT SECTION 15058

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15058-2 Common Motor Requirements for Hartford, Connecticut HVAC Equipment

indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy and premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

1. "Energy Efficient" for all motors less than 1 HP. 2. "Premium Efficient" for all motors 1 HP and larger, including those furnished as

part of equipment specified in equipment sections. The contractor shall confirm utility company minimum requirements for incentive programs and provide motors with efficiencies that meet or exceed the most stringent between NEMA MG-1 and utility company incentive program requirements. The contractor, at no extra charge to the owner, shall replace any motor that does not meet the utility company’s incentive program. The efficiency and/or "NEMA Premium Efficiency" shall be displayed on the motor nameplate and clearly indicated on the equipment shop drawings submitted for approval.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15058-3 Common Motor Requirements for Hartford, Connecticut HVAC Equipment

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors, Inverter Ready: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15077-1 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Hartford, Connecticut

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15077

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Products specified are for applications referenced in other HVAC specifications.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels. 2. Stencils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. Furnish extra copies, in addition to mounted copies, for inclusion in maintenance manuals. Provide one copy on electronic media, type specified by owner.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. Comply with recommendations in ASME A13.1 for labeling of equipment and ducts.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15077-2 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Hartford, Connecticut

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

D. Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification with owner’s desired identification scheme, regardless of numbering indicated on the drawings and specifications. Coordinate owner’s desired identification scheme with ASME and OSHA Standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not

less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Equipment Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation.

2.2 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping and ductwork; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated.

Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1

unless otherwise indicated.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15077-3 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Hartford, Connecticut

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. Major equipment includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Fan coil unit. 2. Exhaust fan

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label: Stenciled labels shall be provided for piping located in return air plenums. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Duct Label: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-1 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15074

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 INTENT

A. It is the intent of this specification to provide the basis of design for the vibration isolation, accommodation of differential seismic motion across building expansion/seismic joints, and seismic restraints on all HVAC systems. The term "SYSTEMS" applies to all equipment, piping, and ductwork on the project. The following specification provides a requirement for the attachment of all non-structural components to the structure.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 2. Restrained spring isolators. 3. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 4. Resilient pipe guides. 5. Restraining braces and cables, and end connection fastening devices.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in accordance with state and local codes and ordinances and the authority having jurisdiction.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-2 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

B. Determine the following, but not limited to, design criteria conditions for the project location required in accordance with all state and local codes and ordinances. Where codes do not reference criteria, refer to the latest "ASHRAE HVAC APPLICATIONS" Handbook. Include criteria with code references in shop drawing submittal.

1. Wind-Restraint Loading:

a. Basic Wind Speed: As determined by the seismic/wind engineer. b. Building Classification Category: As determined by the seismic/wind

engineer. c. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC

component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.

2. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

a. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: As determined by the seismic/wind engineer.

b. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: As determined by the seismic/wind engineer.

1) Component Importance Factor: As determined by the seismic/wind engineer.

2) Component Response Modification Factor: As determined by the seismic/wind engineer.

3) Component Amplification Factor: As determined by the seismic/wind engineer.

c. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): As determined by the seismic/wind engineer.

d. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: As determined by the seismic/wind engineer.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include detailed type, style, materials, rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, OSHPD or an independent agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-3 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, and registered in the state of the project. Provide submittal in two parts – the first part to address all of the equipment on the project prior to installation, and the second to address seismic bracing of piping and ductwork after final routing has been determined.

1. Seismic Code Summary: Written summary of applicable codes, references and criteria specific to the project.

2. List of all HVAC equipment and systems with annotation of where seismic anchoring and bracing is applicable. If a particular component is exempt due to the conditions of the project, it shall be so stated.

3. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic vibration isolated curb-rails, seismic curbs, platform curbs, equipment rails, seismic and wind restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases and expansion/seismic joint accommodation.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 15 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

4. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating seismic bracing and restraints for all components with other systems. Coordinate seismic restraints with vibration isolation and expansion compensation systems. All piping vibration isolation hangers, seismic restraints, and building expansion/seismic joint accommodation are to be laid out by the seismic engineer on each coordination drawing. The vibration/seismic professional engineer of record shall stamp every coordination drawing. If a particular coordination drawing does not require any isolation or restraints, the vibration/seismic engineer shall duly note that condition and stamp the drawing. Layouts of the restraints and isolation hangers by field personnel is not acceptable.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-4 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

F. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" article above. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article.

1. Manufacturer: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations.

H. Insurance Certificates: Submit for the following and in accordance with "Quality Assurance" article.

1. Professional Engineer: Professional liability. 2. Manufacturer: Product liability.

I. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of seismic control devices for compliance with requirements indicated.

J. Field quality-control test reports.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another independent agency acceptable to authorities having

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-5 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional vibration/seismic engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are similar to those indicated for this project in material, design, and extent. Engineer shall carry a minimum $1,000,000 professional liability insurance.

F. Manufacturers of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices shall carry a minimum of $5,000,000 product liability insurance for their products.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate design of seismic restraints and vibration isolation design with expansion compensation systems.

B. Coordinate and design all attachments with building structural system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Kinetics Noise Control. 2. Mason Industries. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Elastomeric Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. Standard neoprene for indoor applications or where pad not exposed to elements. Bridge-bearing neoprene, complying with AASHTO M 251 for exterior applications or where pad is exposed to elements.

C. Elastomeric Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-6 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

D. Restrained Elastomeric Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

3. Shall have OSHPD or approved anchorage ratings.

E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 7. Shall have OSHPD or approved anchorage ratings.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-7 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

G. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods and vertical limit stop. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

H. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod. 8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and

support spring coil.

I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to equipment.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch

movement at start and stop.

J. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-8 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control. 4. Mason Industries. 5. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 6. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, OSHPD or an independent agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion.

D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

H. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-9 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

I. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for

exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control

devices to indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation, seismic- and wind-control devices, and building expansion/seismic joint accommodation for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, OSHPD or an independent agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-10 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, OSHPD or an independent agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

4. Provide thrust restraints when the force of total air thrust exceeds ten percent of the isolated weight. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, OSHPD or an independent agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. In no case will the LOOPING of cable around piping systems be permitted on the project. Seismic restraint cables and angles shall be mechanically attached to the piping hangers with end fastening devices.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-11 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for

exterior applications.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of the project, the seismic design professional engineer of record shall visit the project site and supply a stamped letter of compliance. Any systems found to be installed insufficiently, provide additional measures necessary at contractor’s expense to put the entire installation in compliance.

B. The owner will engage a special inspector to perform field inspections and verification of proper installation of seismic anchorage and bracing of mechanical equipment, and manufacturer’s component certifications of compliance. The contractor is to provide the special inspector safe access to the site throughout the duration of the mechanical work, and to provide timely notification to the special inspector at appropriate points in construction when seismic anchorage and bracing is to be installed.

C. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until

satisfactory results are achieved.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15074-12 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Hartford, Connecticut Piping and Equipment

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.6 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. General: Schedule below indicates type of vibration isolator to be used with types of equipment. All rotating equipment shall have vibration isolation whether listed in schedule or not. Where equipment is not listed, provide isolation type of similar equipment or manufacturer recommended. Schedule below only indicates seismic restraint integral with vibration isolators where applicable. Seismically restrain all equipment using materials and products specified in this section. All equipment with vibration isolation shall be resiliently restrained.

B. Components hung from overhead structure.

1. Fan Coil Units:

a. Isolator Type: Spring hangers with vertical limit stop, 2.0 deflection.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-1 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

HVAC INSULATION SECTION 15083

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Insulation Materials 2. Adhesives. 3. Sealants. 4. Tapes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASJ: All-service jacket.

B. FRK: Foil, reinforced kraft paper.

C. Conditioned Space: An area, room, ceiling space/plenum or space within the building structure being heated or cooled (by direct expansion or chilled water) or both, directly or indirectly, by equipment or appliance and is not subject to outdoor ambient conditions.

D. Unconditioned Space: An area, room or space within the building structure not being conditioned and subject to outdoor ambient conditions.

E. Concealed Ducts/Pipes: Ducts/pipes not visible within the room they are located, after the project is completed.

F. Exposed Ducts/Pipes: Ducts/pipes visible within the room they are located, after the project is completed.

G. Ceiling Space/Plenum: An enclosed portion of the building structure, other than an occupiable space being conditioned, that is designed to allow air movement, and thereby serve as part of an air distribution system.

H. Plenum: Part of duct system connected to diffusers, registers, grilles, louvers for air movement applications.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-2 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for

each type of insulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and

access panels. 5. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-3 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

D. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. b. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation or SSL II. d. CertainTeed Corp.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-4 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FRK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2.3 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FRK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK FRK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-5 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FRK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FRK tape.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.4 SECUREMENTS

A. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-6 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-7 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-8 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-9 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3.5 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-10 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.6 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, supply and outdoor air.

3.7 INDOOR DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Indoor, supply-air and outdoor air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.0-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Indoor, hot, chilled water and cooling condensate.

3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water, above 40 Deg F:

1. Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I 1-1/2 inches thick.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below:

1. Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15083-11 HVAC Insulation Hartford, Connecticut

C. Cooling condensate:

1. Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15124-1 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping Hartford, Connecticut

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 15124

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipe loops and swing connections. 2. Alignment guides and anchors.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, bends, swing connections, anchors and guides.

2. Anchor Details: Locate, size and detail fabrication of each anchor. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Locate, size and detail field assembly and attachment to building structure for each guide length and maximum spider travel.

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end connections, and location for each expansion joint.

5. Location of all components on coordination drawings.

C. Welding certificates.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15124-2 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping Hartford, Connecticut

D. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer.

E. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC. b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. Flex-Weld, Inc. e. Metraflex, Inc. f. Senior Flexonics Pathway.

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe. Determine alignment guide length and maximum spider travel suited for application.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for

use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15124-3 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping Hartford, Connecticut

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless otherwise indicated.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION DRAWING PROCESS

A. As part of the coordination drawing process, the Contractor’s qualified professional engineer shall determine based on system temperatures and pressures, layout and restraints, resultant extent of pipe expansion and design complete expansion compensation for system installed layout.

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Size and install pipe loops as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. Loops and bends shall not be cold sprung.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops, per manufacturer’s instructions. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15124-4 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping Hartford, Connecticut

2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners.

Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15110-1 Valves Hartford, Connecticut

VALVES SECTION 15110

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Copper-alloy ball valves.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1. ASME B31.9 for building services piping includes hydronic piping distribution valves under 350 psig and/or 250 deg F, steam piping distribution valves under 150 psig and/or 366 deg F.

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads and flange faces. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15110-2 Valves Hartford, Connecticut

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature.

If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

F. Valve Ends:

2.3 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Hammond Valve. e. Jamesbury, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15110-3 Valves Hartford, Connecticut

C. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Chilled-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.

D. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15110-4 Valves Hartford, Connecticut

2. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-flange or flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner.

E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15820-1 Duct Accessories Hartford, Connecticut

DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 15820

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Fire Dampers. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Flexible ducts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15820-2 Duct Accessories Hartford, Connecticut

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. McGill AirFlow LLC. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Ruskin Company.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness suitable for application.

b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Single blade. b. Stiffen damper blades for stability. c. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick suitable for application.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or stainless steel suitable for application.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15820-3 Duct Accessories Hartford, Connecticut

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze or molded synthetic suitable for application. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have

axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. Static rated dampers will be unacceptable.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours as required by code for the rating of the construction penetrated.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-supplied, galvanized sheet steel. Field-fabricated sleeves will be unacceptable unless special conditions warrant, upon which request must be submitted to the engineer for review and acceptance prior to installation.

1. Minimum Thickness: As required by manufacturer’s installation instructions for NRTL rating, and of length to suit application.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15820-4 Duct Accessories Hartford, Connecticut

I. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches or 5-3/4 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive, vinyl-coated fiberglass cloth, or similar material, supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15820-5 Duct Accessories Hartford, Connecticut

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, and return, systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. Type of connector shall be suitable for application involved and as follows:

1. Use 3-1/2 inch metal edge connectors on systems below 10,000 cfm. 2. Use indoor type connectors for all systems located indoors.

F. Connect supply diffusers boots to low-pressure ducts directly or with maximum 72-inch lengths of insulated flexible duct clamped in place.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range

of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator

and damper.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-1 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

METAL DUCTS SECTION 15815

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, and outdoor air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 2-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Duct liner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Duct liner. 2. Sealing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: CAD-generated and drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 10. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment,

vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-2 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Coordination with piping and major electrical conduits. 2. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 3. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, speakers, and

sprinklers.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices.

G. Contractor Certification of Compliance that all ductwork has been fabricated and installed in accordance with the SMACNA’s "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," including duct thickness, joining methods and reinforcing for the applicable pressure classifications.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-3 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Owens Corning; SoftR/Aeroflex PLUS Acoustical Duct Liner. b. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group; ToughGard with Enhance Surface. c. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Linacoustic RC. d. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH; Duct Liner E-M.

2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. c. Fungi Resistance: Meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM C 1338 and

ASTM G 21. d. Bacteria Resistance: Meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM G 22. e. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and

smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. f. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with

ASTM C 916. g. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.

1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall.

2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-4 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.

2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-5 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class.

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer.

2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.

2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-6 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to a pressure class that exceeds the scheduled external pressure rating of the fan, but no less than the following, whichever is greater:

1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg. 2. Return and Outdoor Air Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg. 3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness unless greater clearances are required for code clearances to building construction.

H. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-7 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

I. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

J. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."

K. Install duct takeoff types as follows:

1. Rectangular Duct Takeoffs:

a. "Bell mouth" type for primary air supply takeoffs to air terminal units in VAV loop systems.

b. 45 degree type for all other applications.

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

D. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15815-8 Metal Ducts Hartford, Connecticut

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.

4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.

3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS

A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing.

B. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets. 2. Coils and related components. 3. Supply-air return-air and outdoor-air ducts.

C. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

3. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

D. Cleanliness Verification:

1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15763-1 Fan-Coil Units Hartford, Connecticut

FAN-COIL UNITS SECTION 15763

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fan-coil unit and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension components. 2. Structural members to which fan-coil units will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of fan-coil unit indicated.

E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fan-coil units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15763-2 Fan-Coil Units Hartford, Connecticut

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1, include the following:

1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

2.2 DUCTED FAN-COIL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. McQuay International. 2. Approved equal.

B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15763-3 Fan-Coil Units Hartford, Connecticut

C. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2-inch thick coated glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

D. Drain Pans: Insulated galvanized steel with plastic liner formed to slope from all directions to the drain connection as required by ASHRAE 62.

E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked-enamel finish and removable access panels.

F. Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.

G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV (1 inch thick).

H. Hydronic Coils: Seamless copper tubes, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 300 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain with plug.

I. Belt-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

1. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

J. Control devices and operational sequence are specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil unit for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-coil-unit installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15763-4 Fan-Coil Units Hartford, Connecticut

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan-coil unit from structure. Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

D. Verify locations of thermostats, Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices at a height 60 inches above finished floor.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit. 3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.

a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.

B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 16. Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 16. Section "Conductors and Cables."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15763-5 Fan-Coil Units Hartford, Connecticut

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-1 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 15181

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water piping. 2. Chilled-water piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pressure-seal fittings. 2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing

for calibrated-orifice balancing valves.

B. Shop Drawings: CAD-generated and drawn at a minimum of 1/4" = 1'-0" detail layout and fabrication of piping systems, valves, seismic restraints, pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on project. 3. Piping accessories.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-2 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for hydronic systems 350 psig and/or 250 deg F and below, for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-3 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.

2. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation.

2. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-4 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

F. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.5 VALVES

A. Ball Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves (General Duty), NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Griswold Controls.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure

meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 11. Factory molded insulation kit. 12. Provide "low-flow type" valves and sizes for all terminal units (i.e., radiation,

reheat coils, fan coil units, unit heaters, etc.) where gpm is 1.5 gpm or less.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-5 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

2.6 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and return, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves (general duty) in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

C. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-6 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

pipe, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

K. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

L. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

M. Install valves according to Division 15 Section "Valves."

N. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

O. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve.

P. Install unions in pipes 2-inches NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

Q. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.

R. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."

S. Identify piping as specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-7 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. Piping supports must account for expansion and contraction, vibration, seismic restraint, and dead load of piping and its contents.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes and in accordance with MSS-SP-69:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes and in accordance with MSS-SP-69:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-8 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Chemically clean and flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. Install valves, caps or blinds in flanged joints at final equipment connection points to isolate equipment. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Subject piping system up to equipment final connection points to hydrostatic test pressure of 1.5 times the system's working pressure, minimum 100 psig, but shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15181-9 Hydronic Piping Hartford, Connecticut

"SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." Expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure shall be provided with temporary restraint, or shall be isolated from testing.

4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

5. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Test and inspect field welds as follows:

1. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests, and to prepare test reports.

2. Provide the testing agency and the engineer safe access to the site throughout the duration of the piping installation. Notify the testing agency and the engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to the start of welding.

3. Field welds will be tested and inspected according to ASME B31.9 for hydronic distribution systems 350 psig and/or 250 deg F and below, and the inspection procedures listed below:

a. Visual Inspection: Visual inspection on 100 percent of all field pipe welds. The percentage of welds inspected may be modified by the engineer of record, depending on initial results. Witness of the actual welding by the testing agency to occur on a minimum of 15 percent of all field welds.

4. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace welds that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the owner.

5. Additional testing and inspection, at contractor’s expense, will be performed by the owner’s testing agency to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

D. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-1 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS SECTION 15900

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling heat pumps.

B. The work of this Section includes:

1. A complete system including power and control wiring of all control system components and devices.

2. Wiring circuits which are activated/de-activated by a control system component. 3. Control panel wiring to control panels and to terminal strips, and field wiring from

terminal strips to field-mounted devices. 4. Wiring to the "auto" side of hand-off-auto switches. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in

temperature control panels. 6. Power and control wiring to all control system equipment including, but not

limited to, control panels, valve actuators, control transformers, relays, and all other control devices. Provide power wiring from electrical panel circuit breakers. Circuit breakers provided under Division 16 Section "Panelboards." Coordinate requirements with the Division 16 contractor.

7. All line voltage wiring and conduit shall comply with the requirements of Division 16. All control wiring and cable shall comply with the requirements of Division 16. Licensed electricians shall perform all work in strict accordance with the NEC and other local codes.

C. Work By Others: The following work shall be performed by the associated division contractor under the supervision and coordination of this subcontractor:

1. Division 15 Sections "Hydronic Piping" contractor shall be responsible for:

a. Installation of all automatic valves furnished by this contractor. b. Furnish and install all necessary valved pressure taps, water and drain

wells and overflow connections to piping.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-2 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

2. Division 16 "Electrical Contractor" shall be responsible for:

a. Furnishing, installing and terminating all feeder and/or branch circuit wiring to major equipment including:

1) Wiring to and between all disconnects, starters, and equipment motors.

b. Furnishing and installing of circuit breakers (20A-1p) in panels for use by the BMS contractor to power the ATCS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.

2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 7. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control

hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring,

showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-3 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

8. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

9. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list.

C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.

D. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover.

E. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with

data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control

systems.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.

4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.

5. Calibration records and list of set points.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-4 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer:

1. Andover Controls Corporation. 2. Approved equal.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, power and control wiring, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. System Description:

1. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be designed in strict accordance with ASHRAE’s BACnet Standard, 135-2001, to provide interoperability between different building subsystems.

2. The system shall use BACnet network types and protocols exclusively. Non-BACnet-based systems are not acceptable. The Contractor must provide PC-based programming workstations, operator workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions. The Contractor must provide manufacturer’s Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for workstation software and every controller model that are installed.

B. For this project the system shall consist of the following components:

1. Ethernet-based Network Router and/or Controller(s).

C. The BMS Contractor shall furnish Ethernet-based network controllers as described in Part 2 of the specification. These controllers will connect directly to the operator

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-5 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

workstation over Ethernet, using the BACnet/IP protocol at a minimum of 100 mbps, and provide communication to the standalone digital control units and/or other input/output modules. Network controllers shall conform to BACnet device profile B-BC. Network controllers that utilize RS232 serial communications or ARCNET to communicate with the workstations will not be accepted.

D. Network controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Building Controllers (B-BC).

E. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs):

1. Provide the necessary quantity and types of SDCUs to meet the requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including air handlers, central plant control, and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will operate completely standalone, containing all of the I/O and programs to control its associated equipment. Each SDCU shall conform to the BACnet device profile B-AAC.

2. SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC).

F. Operator Workstation: Existing.

1. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. Remote communications. c. Maintenance management. d. Units of Measure: Inch-pound.

2.3 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Manufacturers:

a. T.A.C.

2. Space Temperature Sensor: Thermistor type, 10K ohm (type 3) for continuum, blank cover (no logo), slider, pushbutton, led indicator, laptop jack connection, TAC part # TTS-SE-B-1.

B. Room sensor accessories include the following:

1. Guards: None. 2. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-6 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

C. Current Monitoring Switch: Fan status current monitoring switch sized for appropriate load, Veris part # Hawkeye series.

2.4 ACTUATORS

A. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

2.5 CONTROL VALVES

A. Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. Contractor shall size all control valves for flows and system operating conditions, achieving operation in mid-range of valve stroke.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

2.6 DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance Inc. 2. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 3. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or

replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-7 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with the owner before installation.

3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and

stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating

control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with

sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration and testing. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-8 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make single-point calibration test for accuracy, plus testing of full span for each

analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written

recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at approximately midpoint of span using a precision-resistance source, and check full span with an artificial signal generator.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

5. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Certify that systems have been completed, calibrated and manufacturer start-ups are complete. Verify systems are operating according to the contract documents and the Certificates of Readiness are signed and submitted.

B. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected and corrective work approved.

C. Verify each operating cycle after it has been running for a specified period and is operating in a steady state condition.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15900-9 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Hartford, Connecticut

D. Verify equipment interface with monitoring and control system and TAB criteria including the following:

1. Operation of units in both heating and cooling cycles.

E. Verify proper responses of monitoring and control systems controllers and sensors to include the following:

1. For each controller or sensor, record the indicated monitoring and control system reading and the test instrument reading. If the initial test indicates that the test reading is outside of the control range of the installed device, check calibration of the installed device and adjust as required. Retest malfunctioning devices and record results on checklist or data sheet.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15855-1 Diffusers and Grilles Hartford, Connecticut

DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES SECTION 15855

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Ceiling mounted diffusers and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers and grilles by one of the following:

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15855-2 Diffusers and Grilles Hartford, Connecticut

1. Diffusers and Grilles:

a. Titus. b. Price Industries. c. Tuttle & Bailey.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Diffusers and grilles accessories and requirements are scheduled on Drawings.

2.3 COLOR AND MATERIAL

A. Color and finishes of outlets and inlets shall be as selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s standard finishes.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Provide mounting flanges and frames compatible with the existing ceiling.

C. Install diffusers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts..

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15855-3 Diffusers and Grilles Hartford, Connecticut

D. Support ceiling-mounted outlets and inlets from ductwork and associated hangers to building structure. Ceiling-mounted outlets and inlets may be supported from the suspended ceiling system only where the ceiling system is seismically rated.

E. Install diffusers and grilles without screws or fasteners visible from finished side. Provide mounting clips, frames, brackets, or other materials necessary to firmly mount inlets and outlets in walls or ceilings.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15838-1 Power Ventilators Hartford, Connecticut

POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 15838

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. AMCA 211 and 311 Compliance: Products shall comply with air and sound performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15838-2 Power Ventilators Hartford, Connecticut

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE VENTILATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Fantech. 2. Kanalflact. 3. Loren Cook Company.

B. Description: Inline Centrifugal fan.

C. Housing: Galvanized steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

B. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof for general applications.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15838-3 Power Ventilators Hartford, Connecticut

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16410-1 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Hartford, Connecticut

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 16410

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GD: General duty.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. HD: Heavy duty.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16410-2 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Hartford, Connecticut

Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports, Seismic Restraints, and Expansion Joints." Include the following:

1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" or "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16410-3 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Hartford, Connecticut

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Fusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Nonfusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16410-4 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Hartford, Connecticut

2. Electronic Trip-Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with [5] [30]-mA trip sensitivity.

C. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for

heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup

and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-

adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay. 6. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16410-5 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Hartford, Connecticut

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports, Seismic Restraints, and Expansion Joints."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install switches and circuit breakers according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Provide fused switches for all equipment for proper means of disconnect per the NEC.

G. Install switches and circuit breakers level and plumb, within sight of and no more than 20 ft. from equipment being served.

H. Provide auxiliary contacts in switch or circuit breaker whenever device is located between VFC and motor. Provide control wiring between switch or circuit breaker and equipment on load side of device.

I. Provide power wiring between switch or circuit breaker and equipment on load side of device.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:

1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 3. Verify rating of installed fuses. 4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or

anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification. 5. Test continuity at each line- and load-side circuit.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports, Seismic Restraints, and Expansion Joints."

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16410-6 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Hartford, Connecticut

3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16130-1 Raceways and Boxes Hartford, Connecticut

RACEWAYS AND BOXES SECTION 16130

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16130-2 Raceways and Boxes Hartford, Connecticut

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 articles for where materials shall be applied.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Maverick Tube Corporation. 7. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 8. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16130-3 Raceways and Boxes Hartford, Connecticut

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, set-screw or compression type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, 12 or 3R.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 6. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 7. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 9. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16130-4 Raceways and Boxes Hartford, Connecticut

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum or galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16130-5 Raceways and Boxes Hartford, Connecticut

3. EMT:

a. Utilize steel compression fittings in the following locations:

1) Damp locations. 2) Boiler rooms. 3) Mechanical rooms. 4) Within block walls.

b. Utilize steel set screw fittings in the following locations:

1) Dry locations. 2) Above suspended ceilings. 3) Within stud walls.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

E. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. Within return air plenums utilize plenum rated bushings.

G. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

H. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Within return air plenums utilize a #10 AWG conductor in place of a plastic line.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16130-6 Raceways and Boxes Hartford, Connecticut

I. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

J. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16120-1 Conductors and Cables Hartford, Connecticut

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 16120

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 articles for where materials shall be applied.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16120-2 Conductors and Cables Hartford, Connecticut

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Rome Cable Corporation. 5. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 5 for Types THHN-THWN.

D. Multi-conductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with insulated equipment ground conductor, with ground wire.

E. Multi-Conductor Cable Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16120-3 Conductors and Cables Hartford, Connecticut

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway to outlet box located within 10 feet of first wiring device, luminaire, or utilization equipment indicated on documents served by branch circuit. Metal-clad cable, Type MC may be used on load side of this outlet box.

E. Feeders and branch Circuits Connected to Generator, Emergency or Essential Power Systems of Any Type: Type THHN-THWN in raceway independent from all other wiring and equipment.

F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

G. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

H. Minimum Branch Circuit Conductor Size: #12 AWG. For all 120 volt circuits in excess of 100 feet from power source to last device, provide #10 AWG entire length of circuit. For all 120 volt circuits in excess of 200 feet from power source to last device, provide #8 AWG entire length of circuit. For all 208 volt circuits in excess of 200 feet from power source to last device, provide #10 AWG entire length of circuit. Wherever common neutrals are utilized, increase size of neutral one wire size over phase conductor size.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" and "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least [6 inches] [12 inches] of slack.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16120-4 Conductors and Cables Hartford, Connecticut

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16075-1 Electrical Identification Hartford, Connecticut

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16075

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Identification for raceway. 2. Identification for conductors and control cable. 3. Warning labels and signs. 4. Instruction signs. 5. Equipment identification labels. 6. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16075-2 Electrical Identification Hartford, Connecticut

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Color for Printed Legend:

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16075-3 Electrical Identification Hartford, Connecticut

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 48 INCHES."

2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 2 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits 100 A or Larger: Identify with orange snap-around label.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color-coded, snap-around, color-coding bands:

1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. 3. Control Wiring: Green and red.

C. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape or write-on tags. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16075-4 Electrical Identification Hartford, Connecticut

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Controls with external control power connections. b. HVAC equipment.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of switchboards, motor control centers, and distribution panelboards.

F. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay or self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Enclosed switches. c. Enclosed circuit breakers.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16075-5 Electrical Identification Hartford, Connecticut

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting Sections.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16060-1 Grounding and Bonding Hartford, Connecticut

GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 16060

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16060-2 Grounding and Bonding Hartford, Connecticut

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16051-1 Common Work Results for Electrical Hartford, Connecticut

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SECTION 16051

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16051-2 Common Work Results for Electrical Hartford, Connecticut

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-1 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES SECTION 16010

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of this Division and are to be considered a part of this Contract.

B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are repeated in this Section of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions be assumed to be omitted if not repeated herein.

C. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under each Section of Division 16.

D. The following information contains specifications of Work in connection with, and in addition to, this Division:

1. All plans associated with the project. 2. All specifications associated with the project.

E. Work is not limited to this Division or the Drawings associated with this Division. Work is specified throughout all the plans and specifications associated with the Project.

F. Division of Work responsibilities is as defined and directed by the Bidding Agent and/or the Bidding General Contractor.

1.2 INTENT

A. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to call for finished Work, tested and ready for operation.

B. Furnish, deliver and install any apparatus, appliance, material or Work not shown on the Drawings but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the Work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, under their respective Section without additional expense to the Owner.

C. Include in the Work minor details not shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and operation, as though they were hereinafter shown or specified.

D. Provide Engineer written notice of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and any necessary items of Work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that Work under each Section has included the cost of all required items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-2 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

E. The Work indicated is diagrammatic. The Engineer may require, included as part of this Contract, the relocation of devices to “reasonable” distances from the general locations shown. A “reasonable” distance for this project is defined herein as 10 feet.

F. Verbal clarifications of the Drawings or Specifications during the bid period are not to be relied upon. Refer any questions or clarifications to the Engineer at least five Working days prior to bidding to allow for issuance of an addendum. After the five-day deadline, Bidder must make a decision and qualify the Bid, if the Bidder feels it necessary.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and Work included in the Contract. (Do not scale the Drawings.) Consult the Drawings and Details for exact locations of fixtures and equipment; where same are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Engineer.

B. Closely follow Drawings in layout of Work; check Drawings associated with other Divisions to verify spaces in which Work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom. Where space conditions appear inadequate, notify Engineer before proceeding with installations.

C. Engineer may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with Work of other trades and for proper execution of the Work.

D. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of the Documents, include the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost in the Contract price. It is at the Engineer’s discretion to decide on the item and the manner in which the Work will be installed.

1.4 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Before submitting a Bid, visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all conditions under which the Work will be installed. Contractor will be held responsible for any assumptions, omissions or errors made as a result of failure to become familiar with the site and the Contract Documents.

B. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established benchmarks. Reference all Work from these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the Work.

C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements and those indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, notify the Engineer and do not proceed with that Work until instructions have been received from the Engineer.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The Codes and Standards listed below apply to all electrical Work. Where Codes or Standards are mentioned in these Specifications, follow the latest edition or revision:

NEMA - Standards ANSI C1 - National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-3 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

ANSI C50 - Rotating Electrical Machinery ANSI C51.1 - Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors ANSI C52.1 - Motors and Generators (NEMA MG1) FIPS Publication #94 - Guideline on Electrical Power for ADP Installations

B. The current adopted editions of the following State or local Codes apply:

State Building Code, Supplements, Amendments and referenced publications State Fire Safety Code, Supplements, Amendments and referenced publications Local Building Code National Electric Code NFPA 70 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72

C. The following abbreviations are used within these Specifications:

IES - Illuminating Engineering Society NEC - National Electrical Code ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials EPA - Environmental Protection Agency IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration UL - Underwriters' Laboratories

D. All materials furnished and all Work installed comply with the rules and recommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and with the requirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction.

E. Include in the Work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

1.6 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, pay all Government and State sales taxes and fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the Work. File all necessary Drawings, prepare all Documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments having jurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspections for Work and deliver a copy to the Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the Work.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Carry out all Work in conjunction with other trades and give full cooperation in order that all Work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing other Contractors, especially the General Contractor or Construction Manager, with information as to openings, chases, equipment locations and panels required by other trades.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-4 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

B. Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Documents and mutually arrange Work so as to avoid interference. In general, heating piping and drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical raceways. The Engineer regarding the arrangement of Work, which cannot be agreed upon by the Contractors, will make final decisions.

C. Where the Work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or will interfere with Work of other trades, assist in Working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.

D. If Work is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or so as to cause interference with Work of other Sections, the Contractor causing the interference will make necessary changes to correct the condition, without extra charge to the Owner.

E. Initial contact and coordination has been conducted with utility entities for the purposes of the preparation of Bid Documents. Coordinate all final specific utility requirements.

1.8 ACCEPTANCES

A. The equipment, materials, Workmanship, design and arrangement of all Work installed are subject to the review of the Engineer.

B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, submit to the Engineer for review a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the Work. The intent to use the exact make specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting such a list.

1. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipment specified, notify the Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of the awarding of the Contract. In such instances, deviations may be made pending review by the Engineer or Owner's representative.

C. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured article is specified by reference to the catalog or model number of a manufacturer, the Specifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, verify the duty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where the Contractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent.

D. If material or equipment is installed before shop drawing review, liability for its removal and replacement is assumed by the Contractor, at no extra charge to the Owner, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

E. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject Work in progress shall not be interpreted as acceptance of Work not in conformance to the Drawings and/or Specifications. Correct Work and/or materials not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications whenever non-conformance is discovered.

1.9 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (substitute or provide an equivalent) from the equipment as hereinafter specified, a request is to be made in writing. State in the request whether it is a substitution or an equivalent to that specified and the amount of credit or extra

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-5 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

cost involved. Include a copy of request in the Electrical Base Bid with manufacturer's equipment cuts. The Base Bid must be based on using the materials and equipment as specified with no exceptions.

B. In these Specifications and on the accompanying Drawings, one or more makes of materials, apparatus or appliances may have been specified for use in this installation. This has been done for convenience in fixing the standard of Workmanship, finish and design required for installation. In the event that only one (1) manufacturer of a product is specified and it is found that the manufacturer has discontinued the product, use an acceptable equivalent product that meets the requirements of an equivalent product, as noted below, and has all the features of the originally specified product.

C. The details of Workmanship, finish and design and the guaranteed performance of any material, apparatus or appliance which the Contractor desires to deviate for those mentioned herein must also conform to these standards.

D. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used providing it conforms, in the opinion of and meets with the acceptance of the Engineer, to the requirements of these Specifications.

E. Where two or more names are given as equivalents, the Contractor must use one of the named equivalents.

F. Where one name only is used and is followed by the words "or accepted as equivalent", the Contractor must use the item named, but he may apply for an equipment deviation through the prescribed manner in accordance with this Specification.

G. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as an "equivalent" to such equipment, material or devices specified must meet the following requirements:

1. The equivalent must have the same construction features such as, but not limited to:

a. Material thickness, gauge, weight, density, etc. b. Welded, riveted, bolted, etc., construction c. Finish, priming, corrosion protection

2. The equivalent must perform with the same or better efficiency of energy consumption. 3. Local representation by the manufacturer for service, parts and technical information

must be available. 4. The equivalent must bear the same labels of performance certification as is applicable to

the specified item.

H. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified or detailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign and all new Drawings and detailing required are to, with the concurrence of the Engineer, be prepared by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

I. Where such accepted deviation or substitution requires a different quantity and arrangement of wiring, raceway and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, with the concurrence of the Engineer, furnish and install any such additional equipment required by the system at no additional cost to the Owner, including any costs added to other trades due to the substitution.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-6 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

J. The definition of "accepted equivalent" is a product that, in the opinion of the Engineer, is acceptable for the intended application in lieu of the product listed in the Specifications or noted on the Drawings and has no cost impact on the project.

K. The definition of “substitution” is a product that, in the opinion of the Engineer, is of a lesser quality and/or has cost impact on the project or requires other changes to meet the Specification.

1.10 CHANGES IN WORK

A. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and the Engineer, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract sum or the Contract time. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract sum or the Contract time.

B. All changes in the Work follow the recommendations of Article 12 of AIA General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

1.11 MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION

A. Manufacturer's nameplate, name or trademark and address must be attached permanently to all equipment and materials furnished under this Division. The nameplate must indicate the name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial or model number, electrical characteristics and other information. Nameplates of a Contractor or distributor are not acceptable.

B. All material and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems must bear the label of or be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other accredited authoritative agencies or testing organizations approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to individual specification sections for additional submittal information.

B. Submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment and material required to complete the project. No material or equipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has in his possession reviewed shop drawings for the particular material or equipment.

C. Submit shop drawings as soon as practical, within 60 days after award of Contract and before any material or equipment is purchased. Submit for review copies of all shop drawings to be incorporated in the Electrical Contract. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for the quantity of copies required for submission. Where quantities are not specified, provide seven (7) copies for review.

D. Submit shop drawings for all equipment and/or devices specified. Included in the shop drawings are manufacturer's names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams and other such descriptive data as may be required to identify the equipment. No consideration will be given to a partial shop drawing submittal.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-7 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a cover sheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or material being submitted.

2. Clearly indicate all specific options and/or alternatives. Failure to do so will be grounds for rejection.

3. Clearly mark all shop drawings with the specific associated specification section.

E. Failure of the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for review is not an entitlement to an extension of Contract time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. Also, it does not entitle the Contractor to purchase, furnish and/or install equipment that has not been reviewed by the Engineer. All costs associated with the delay of construction due to equipment and/or materials arriving late or shipped to the site at a premium cost due to late or improper shop drawing submittal are the responsibility of the Contractor.

F. Furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation Work and for the purpose of making adjoining Work conform; furnish setting plans and shop details to other trades as required.

G. Review rendered on shop drawings will not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does not indicate that drawings have been checked in detail; said review does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing Work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verify available space prior to submitting shop drawings.

H. Review of shop drawings does not apply to quantity nor relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Review of shop drawings is final; no further changes will be allowed without the written consent of the Engineer.

I. Shop drawings must be specific with items submitted for review clearly identified in red ink. Data of general nature will not be accepted.

J. Contractor shall make any corrections required by Engineer and shall resubmit required number of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples until accepted. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings to revisions other than corrections requested by Engineer on previous submissions. Engineer shall review no more than one resubmittal of any shop drawing or sample at Owner’s expense. The fees for review of additional resubmittals shall be paid by the Contractor at the Engineer’s standard rates.

1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain a record set of Electrical Drawings at the job site on which any changes in location of equipment, devices, panels and major raceways are recorded.

B. At the end of construction, provide the Owner with a complete set of As-Built Drawings, including all power and lighting plans (indicating as-built circuiting), power and special systems riser diagrams and panel schedules and fire alarm use. Prepare As-Built documentation utilizing the most recent version of AutoCAD. Provide the Owner with a “CD ROM” disk and one set of reproducible mylar documents.

C. If electronic copies of the contract documents are made available to the Contractor for use in production of As-Built documentation, the Contractor assumes responsibility for completeness and accuracy of the As-Built documents. Translation or manipulation of electronic documents provided to the Contractor is the responsibility of the Contractor.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-8 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1.14 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials and apparatus required for the Work, except as otherwise specified, must be new and of first-class quality and be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail and so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, furnish a first-class standard article as accepted by the Engineer.

B. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who is constantly in charge of the installation of the Work, and present on site at all times during the Work. Furnish all skilled Workmen, helpers and labor required to install, unload, transfer, erect, connect up, adjust, start, operate and test each system.

C. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, all equipment and materials must be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.

D. Quality of Work must be consistent with good trade practice and installed in a neat, Workmanlike manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any Work which, in his opinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. Replacement of said Work, in a satisfactory manner, will be at no extra charge to the Owner.

1.15 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Work under each Section includes protecting the Work and material of all other Sections from damage by Work or Workmen and includes making good all damage thus caused.

B. The Contractor is responsible for Work and equipment until final turn-over to the Owner. Protect Work and Equipment from water, dust and dirt, and against theft, injury or damage. Carefully store and secure material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. Close with temporary covers or plugs open ends of Work during construction to prevent entry of water, obstructing or other foreign materials.

C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place and connecting up completely of any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section also includes exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures and includes the cost of replacing any of the above equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure on the part of the Contractor to protect.

1.16 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING

A. Furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished under this Division. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.17 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavation and backfilling will be coordinated with the Division 2 of the Specifications.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-9 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to field coordinate sizes, depths, fill and bedding requirements and any other excavation Work required under this Division.

1.18 WATERPROOFING AND PENETRATIONS

A. Where any Work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete and floors in wet areas, review the method of installation with the Engineer before Work is done. Furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking, flashing and fittings required to make openings and penetrations absolutely watertight.

B. All piping and raceway penetrations through the roof shall be provided with Pate Type PCA pipe curb assemblies or acceptable equivalent. Coordinate installation details with the roofing system being used for the project.

1.19 ACCESSIBILITY AND ACCESS PANELS

A. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment includes, but is not limited to: controllers, switchgear, etc. Furnish access doors if better accessibility is required. Minor deviations from Drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, but changes of magnitude or which involve extra cost must not be made without review by the Engineer.

B. Upon completion of the Project, physically demonstrate that all equipment and devices installed have been located and/or provided with adequate access panels for repair, maintenance and/or operation. Relocate any equipment not so furnished or provide additional access panels at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.20 SHUTDOWNS

A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, perform the connection of the new system at such time as designated by the Owner's representative. Complete Work on premium time if required at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Notify the Engineer and the Owner of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the Work is to be performed.

C. Arrange Work associated with the shutdown of existing systems for continuous performance. Provide all necessary labor, including overtime, if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections.

1.21 TEMPORARY SERVICES

A. Refer to the General Conditions and Special Conditions for a full description of the temporary services to be provided.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-10 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1.22 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean all equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation.

B. If any part of a system should be stopped or clogged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, disconnect the system wherever necessary to locate and remove obstructions. Then clean and reconnect the system. Repair or replace any Work damaged in the course of removing obstructions when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Upon completion of Work under the Contract, remove from the premises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from the Work. Remove any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor, all floor areas must be left clean.

1.23 GUARANTEES

A. Guarantee all materials and Workmanship under these Specifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner.

B. During this guaranteed period, correct or replace all defects developing through materials or Workmanship immediately as directed by the Engineer without expense to the Owner; make all such repairs or replacements to the Owner’s satisfaction.

1.24 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified, all wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 16 Specifications.

B. All power wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 16 complete from power source to equipment junction box and proper means of disconnect per NEC and Division 16. The Division 16 Contractor shall provide all enclosed switches, unless noted otherwise.

1.25 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

C. Contractor is responsible for carrying out the requirements of this Section at no additional cost to Owner. Cost of defective, conflicting, ill-timed work, or unnecessary cutting, coring, patching, and repairing are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Provide cutting and patching per Division 1 requirements. Furnish sketches showing the location and sizes of all openings, chases, etc., required for the installation of the Work.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 16010-11 General Conditions for Electrical Trades Hartford, Connecticut

1.26 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specified under each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, he shall fully instruct the Owner or the Owner’s representative in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least 72 hours notice to the Owner and the Engineer in advance of this period.

B. The Contractor shall formally submit for delivery to the Engineer three (3) complete bound sets of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this Division. All instructions shall be submitted in draft for review prior to final issue. Manufacturer’s advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instruction.

C. The Contractor, in the above-mentioned instructions, shall include the maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division.

D. The appropriate Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routine maintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assure accessibility to all devices.

E. An authorized manufacturer’s representative shall attest in writing that the equipment has been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. The following equipment, if included on this project, will require this inspection: variable frequency controllers, switchgear, emergency generators, automatic transfer switches, master clock systems, fire alarm systems, lighting control systems, public address systems. These letters will be bound into the operating and maintenance books.

F. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related to operating instructions.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-1 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15950

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-2 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-3 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound IP units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-5 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

G. Check for airflow blockages.

H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

I. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-6 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to coil. 3. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually

operated.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure flow and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-7 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent.

3.11 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop

Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15950-8 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Hartford, Connecticut

5. Engineer's name and address. 6. Contractor's name and address. 7. Report date. 8. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the

report. Number each page in the report. 10. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15940-1 Sequence of Operations Hartford, Connecticut

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS SECTION 15940

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

1.4 COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. The following items are common requirements that apply unless noted otherwise:

1. All set points shall be program adjustable at the operator workstation. 2. Low limits shall be alarmed. 3. All fan proof of operation shall be by current sensors.

1.5 FAN COIL UNIT (FCU-13)

A. System Description:

1. The unit consists of an outdoor air damper, hot water heating coil, chilled water cooling coil, and supply fan. The BMS shall control all unit functions.

B. Occupied:

1. Occupied mode shall be initiated thru the operator’s workstation, or locally at the room thermostat.

2. The outdoor air damper shall open and the supply fan shall operate continuously. 3. In cooling mode the chilled water valve shall modulate to satisfy the space

temperature setpoint of 74 degrees F (adj.). The chilled water valve shall be closed during heating mode.

4. In the heating mode, the hot water valve shall modulate to satisfy the space temperature setpoint of 72 degrees F (adj). The hot water valve shall be closed during cooling mode.

SCHEDULE A

Legislative Office Building January 16, 2008 Fresh Air Study 15940-2 Sequence of Operations Hartford, Connecticut

C. Unoccupied:

1. The outdoor air damper shall close and the supply fan shall stop. 2. Unoccupied space temperature setpoints shall be adjustable at the operator’s

workstation.

D. Safeties: 1. A low limit temperature sensor on the discharge of the heating coil shall de-

energize the supply fan when temperatures below 40°F are sensed. The outdoor air damper shall fully close, and a corresponding alarm shall be indicated at the operator’s workstation.

2. Supply fan status shall be monitored by the BMS via current transducers. 3. Upon sensing fluid, the auxiliary drain pan liquid sensor shall shut down the unit

and send a corresponding alarm to the operator’s workstation.

E. Operator Station Display:

• System graphic • System occupied/unoccupied mode • Supply fan status • Space temperature heating setpoint • Space temperature cooling setpoint • Supply air temperature sensor • Discharge air temperature sensor • Auxiliary drain pan sensor/alarm

1.6 EXHAUST FAN (EF-A)

A. Occupied/Unoccupied:

1. The fan shall run continuously.

B. Operator Station Display:

• System graphic • Fan status

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 01/16/08

SCHEDULE A

SCHEDULE B

SCHEDULE B